05 Infiniti G35 Owners Manual

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way ofthinking about vehicle design. It inte-grates advanced engineering and superiorcraftsmanship with a simple, refined aes-thetic sensitivity associated with tradi-tional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxuryand beauty. The car itself is important, butso is the sense of harmony that the vehicleevokes in its driver, and the sense of satis-faction you feel with the INFINITI — fromthe way it looks and drives to the high levelof retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI tothe fullest, we encourage you to read thisOwner’s Manual immediately. It explainsall of the features, controls and perfor-mance characteristics of your INFINITI; italso provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletcan be found in your Owner’s literatureportfolio. Always carry it with you whenyou take your INFINITI to an authorizedretailer. The portfolio contents providecomplete information about all warrantiescovering this vehicle, the periodic mainte-nance required to keep the warranties ineffect as well as the INFINITI RoadsideAssistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Careand Lemon Law Information Booklet willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’slemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis-fying ownership experience for as long asyou own your car. Should you have anyquestions regarding your INFINITI or anINFINITI dealer, please contact our Con-sumer Affairs department at:In U.S. 1-800-662-6200.In Canada 1-800-361-4792.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVESAFELYBefore driving your vehicle please readyour Owner’s Manual carefully. This willensure familiarity with controls and main-tenance requirements, assisting you inthe safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to helpensure a safe and comfortable trip for you andyour passengers!

O Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs.

O Always observe posted speed limits andnever drive too fast for conditions.

O Always use seat belts and child re-straints. Pre-teen children should beseated in the rear seat.

O Always provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features to alloccupants of the vehicle.

O Always review this Owner’s Manual forimportant safety information.

Z 04.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety or durability, and mayeven violate governmental regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from modificationsmay not be covered under INFINITI war-ranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. There-fore, you may find some information thatdoes not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illus-trations in this manual are those in effectat the time of printing. INFINITI reservesthe right to change specifications or de-sign at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATIONABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in thismanual. They are used in the followingways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moderatepersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.To avoid or reduce the risk, the proceduresmust be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do notdo this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points tothe front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto these call attention to an item in the il-lustration.

SIC0697

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addition, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

© 2004 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual maybe reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Exterior ............................................................ 0-2Sedan ......................................................... 0-2Coupe ......................................................... 0-3

Passenger compartment ................................... 0-4Sedan ......................................................... 0-4Coupe ......................................................... 0-5

Instrument panel ............................................. 0-6Meters and gauges........................................... 0-8Engine compartment locations ......................... 0-9

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SEDAN

1. Engine hood (Page 3-24)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch(P.2-20)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-19)

4. Windshield (P.8-20)

5. Sunroof (P.2-39)

6. Power windows (P.2-37)

7. Towing hook (P.6-15)

8. Fog light switch (P.2-24)

9. Front side marker light (P.8-32)

10. Tire pressure (P.8-36)

11. Flat tire (P.6-2)

12. Tire chains (P.8-42)

13. Mirrors (P.3-32)

14. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)

15. Trunk lid (P.3-25)

16. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)

17. Rear window defogger switch(P.2-20)

18. Fuel filler lid (P.3-28)

19. Rear combination light (P.8-32)

20. Child safety locks (P.3-5)SSI0069

EXTERIOR

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

COUPE

1. Engine hood (P.3-24)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch(P.2-20)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-19)

4. Windshield (P.8-20)

5. Sunroof (P.2-39)


7. Towing hook (P.6-12)

8. Fog light switch (P.2-24)

9. Front side marker light (P.8-32)

10. Tire pressure (P.8-36)

11. Flat tire (P.6-2)

12. Tire chains (P.8-42)

13. Mirrors (P.3-32)

14. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)

15. Trunk lid (P.3-25)

16. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)

17. Rear window defogger switch(P.2-20)

18. Fuel filler lid (P.3-28)

19. Rear combination light (P.8-32)

SSI0005

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SEDAN

1. Automatic anti-glare mirror, HomeLink(P.3-32, 2-44)

2. Interior lights (P.2-41)

3. Sun visors (P.3-32)


5. Front seat (P.1-2)

6. Rear cup holders (P.2-32)

7. Interior trunk access (P.1-6)

8. Front cup holders (P.2-31)

9. Console box (P.2-34)

10. Rear seat (P.1-5)

11. LATCH system (P.1-24)

SSI0070

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

COUPE

1. Automatic anti-glare mirror, HomeLink(P.3-32, 2-44)

2. Interior lights (P.2-41)

3. Sun visors (P.3-32)


5. Front seat (P.1-2)

6. Coat hook (P.2-36)

7. Interior trunk access (P.1-6)

8. Parking brake (MT models) (P.5-18)

9. Front cup holders (P.2-31)

10. Console box (P.2-34)

11. Rear cup holders (P.2-32)

12. Rear seat (P.1-5)

13. LATCH system (P.1-24)

SSI0074


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-20)

2. Security indicator (P.2-18)3. Steering switch for audio control

(P.4-27)4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-35)/

Horn (P.2-25)

5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-20)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P.2-19)8. Center ventilator (P.4-10)9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Passen-

ger air bag status light (P.1-44)10. Rear window and outside mirror de-

fogger switch (P.2-20)11. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-11)12. Clock (P.2-28)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P.4-2)14. Passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-35)15. Upper glove box (except for Navigation

system equipped models)(P.2-34)

16. Side window defogger (P.4-10)17. Side ventilator (P.4-10)18. Hood lock release handle (P.3-24)19. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-25)20. VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control) OFF

switch (P.2-27)21. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-23)22. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-33)23. Fuse box (P.8-26)24. Automatic steering column control (if

so equipped) (P.3-31)25. Manual steering column control

(P.3-30)26. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-6)27. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-27)28. Radio/CD player (P.4-22)29. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter (P.2-29)30. Heated seat switch (P.2-25)31. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P.2-24)32. Glove box (P.2-33)

SIC2792

INSTRUMENT PANEL


Z 05.2.24/V35-D/V5.0 X

*: Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

2. Tachometer (P.2-4)

3. Automatic transmission position indi-cator (AT models) (P.5-11)/Up-shift in-dicator (MT models) (P.5-15)

4. Speedometer (P.2-3)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge(P.2-4)

6. Reset knob for trip odometer (P.2-3)

7. Odometer (P.2-3)/Up-shift indicatorsetting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)

SSI0075

METERS AND GAUGES


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

VQ35DE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-24)

2. Battery (P.8-16)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (P.8-15)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir(P.8-15)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)

11. Air cleaner (P.8-20)

SDI1485

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system

Seats................................................................ 1-2Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-2Rear seat adjustment .................................. 1-5Head restraint adjustment........................... 1-8Active head restraint (front seats) ............... 1-8Armrest (if so equipped) ............................. 1-9

Seat belts......................................................... 1-9Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-9Child safety............................................... 1-12Pregnant women ....................................... 1-13Injured persons ........................................ 1-13Three-point type seat belt with retractor ... 1-13Seat belt extenders................................... 1-17Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-17

Child restraints............................................... 1-18Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-18Child restraint installation on rear seatcenter or outboard positions..................... 1-19

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system....................................... 1-24Top tether strap child restraint ................ 1-26Child restraint installation on frontpassenger seat ......................................... 1-27

Booster seats ................................................. 1-30Precautions on booster seats.................... 1-30Booster seat installation on rear seatcenter or outboard positions..................... 1-33Booster seat installation on frontpassenger seat ......................................... 1-34

Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-35Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ...................................................... 1-35Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 1-50Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-51

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit well backin the seat and adjust the seat beltproperly. See “Precautions on seat beltusage” later in this section.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

Operating tips

O The seat motor has an auto-reset over-load protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 sec-onds, then reactivate the switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for along period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”for automatic seat positioner operation.

SSS0133B

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Forward and backward

Moving the switch j1 forward or back-ward will slide the seat forward or back-ward to the desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch j2 backwarduntil the desired angle is obtained. Tobring the seatback forward again, movethe switch forward and move your bodyforward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help ob-tain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautionson seat belt usage” later in this section.)The seatback may also be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicleis parked.

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Pull the switch up or push it down to ad-just the angle and height of the seat.

SSS0182C SSS0183

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provideslower back support to the driver. Movethe lever up or down to adjust the seatlumbar area.

Walk-in mechanism (Coupe)

This feature makes it easier to get in andout of the rear seat.Use the following procedure when gettingin and out of the rear seat.

1. Pull the seatback lever upward j1 orpull the walk-in lever j2 on the side ofthe front seat upward to fold the frontseatback down.

2. To slide the front seat forward, pushthe seatback switch j3 below theseatback lever. The front seat willmove forward.

3. Get in or out of the vehicle.

4. Push the seatback switch j3 again toreturn the front seat to its original po-sition and raise the seatback.

O The front passenger seat will stop at 7in (175 mm) from its front most posi-tion to retain space for the rear pas-senger.

CAUTION

O Do not raise the seatback before re-

SSS0184 SSS0365


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

turning the front seat to its original po-sition.

O When returning the seat to its originalposition, confirm the seat and seatbackare locked properly.

O Be careful not to pinch your hand orfoot or bump your head when operatingthe walk-in seat. The seatback will folddown rapidly.

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. They may bepinched and damaged.

The automatic forwarding and reversingwill not work or stop under the followingconditions:

O When the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O When the seat belt is fastened.

O When the selector lever is not in the P(Park) position (Automatic transmis-sion model’s driver’s seat) or the park-ing brake is not applied (Manualtransmission model’s driver’s seat)

O When the door is closed.

O When the slide adjusting switch is op-erated.

REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Reclining (if so equipped)

Pull the reclining lever and position theseat back at the desired angle. Releasethe reclining lever after positioning theseat at the desired angle.

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will not

SSS0185


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

be against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit well backin the seat and adjust the seat beltproperly. See “Precautions on seat beltusage” later in this section.

O After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securely locked.

Interior trunk access

Sedan:

Pull the partition down to access thetrunk from the rear seat.

The partition can be locked using themaster key to prevent unauthorized ac-cess.

To lock the partition, turn the key to thelock position j1 . To unlock, turn the keyto the unlock position j2 .

Remove the key while opening or closing

the partition. Otherwise, the partition maybe damaged.

SSS0366


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe:

Pull the handle on the left side of thetrunk and push the seatback forward toaccess the trunk from the rear seat.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a suddenstop or collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

When raising the seatback, make sure tolock the seatback. The pop up knob onthe seatback will latch in when the seat-back is locked.

SSS0220 SSS0219 SSS0298


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up.To lower, push the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

Adjust the head restraints so the center islevel with the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant protec-tion against injury in an accident. Do notremove them. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous sec-tion. Failure to do so can reduce the ef-fectiveness of the active head restraint.

O Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system can

SSS0125D SSS0178A SPA1025


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

prevent all injuries in any accident.

O Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac-tive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizingthe force that the seatback receives fromthe occupant in a rear-end collision. Themovement of the head restraint helpssupport the occupant’s head by reducingits backward movement and helping ab-sorb some of the forces that may lead towhiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-lisions at low to medium speeds in whichit is said that whiplash injury occursmost.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-sion, the head restraints return to theiroriginal positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraintsas described in the previous section.

ARMREST (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest forward until it is hori-zontal.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted, and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat, your chances ofbeing injured or killed in an accidentand/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. INFINITI strongly en-courages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territories re-quire that seat belts be worn at all timeswhen a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0186

SEAT BELTS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

O The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of the en-tire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

O Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible around the hips, not thewaist. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

O Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-tiveness.

O Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

O Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed and allseat belts fastened, it may indicate amalfunction in the system. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See an INFINITI dealer.

SSS0136A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.

O All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby an INFINITI dealer. INFINITI rec-ommends that all seat belt assembliesin use during a collision be replacedunless the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision shouldalso be inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

O All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations. Thechild restraints should be replaced ifthey are damaged.

SSS0134A SSS0016

SSS0014


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, in-cluding doctors, teachers, governmenttraffic safety offices, and community orga-nizations. Every child is different, so besure to learn the best way to transportyour child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

O Rear-facing child restraint

O Front-facing child restraint

O Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on thechild’s size. Generally, infants (up toabout 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)should be placed in rear-facing child re-straints. Front-facing child restraints areavailable for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1year old. Booster seats are used to helpposition a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a

child who can no longer use a front-facingchild restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt may cometoo close to the face or neck. The lap beltmay not fit over their small hip bones. Inan accident, an improperly fitting seat beltcould cause serious or fatal injury. Alwaysuse appropriate child restraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada re-quire the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. (See “Childrestraints” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child re-straints available for larger children foradditional protection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat if possible. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer when prop-erly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front pas-senger. See “Supplemental RestraintSystem” later in this section for precau-tions.

Infants

Infants up to at least one year old shouldbe placed in a rear-facing child restraint.INFINITI recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint thatfits your vehicle and always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

Small children

Children that are over one year old andweigh between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs(18 kg) can be placed in a forward facingchild restraint. Refer to the manufactur-er’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. INFINITI recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle and


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child re-straints should be seated and restrainedby the seat belts which are provided. Theseat belt may not fit properly if the childis less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) talland weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child beplaced in a commercially availablebooster seat if the shoulder belt in thechild’s seating position fits close to theface or neck or if the lap portion of theseat belt goes across the abdomen. Thebooster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion ofthe shoulder and the lap belt is low onthe hips. A booster seat can only be usedin seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have alabel certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.Once the child has grown so the shoulder

belt is no longer on or near the face andneck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seatand do not allow a child in the cargo areaswhile the vehicle is moving. The child couldbe seriously injured or killed in an accidentor sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat beltshould be worn snug, and always positionthe lap belt as low as possible around thehips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder beltover your abdominal area. Contact yourdoctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured per-sons use seat belts, depending on the in-jury. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit well backin the seat and adjust the seat beltproperly.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier inthis section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle until it clicks.

• The retractor is designed to lockduring a sudden stop or on impact.A slow pulling motion will permitthe belt to move, and allow yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack. Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger and rear seat beltshave a locking mechanism for child re-straint installation. It is referred to as theautomatic locking mode.

When the locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended againuntil the seat belt tongue is detached

SSS0292Front seat

SSS0293Rear seat

SSS0290Front seat


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

from the buckle and fully retracted. Foradditional information, see “Child re-straints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause un-comfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely securedin the latched position. If they are not com-pletely secured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button onthe buckle. The seat belt will automati-cally retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed tolock belt movement using two separatemethods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

SSS0291ARear seat

SSS0326


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

You can check their operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pullquickly forward. The retractor shouldlock and restrict further belt move-ment.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any questions aboutbelt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(For Sedan front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best suited foryou. (See “Precautions on seat beltusage” earlier in this section.) To adjust,pull the release button j1 , and then movethe shoulder belt anchor j2 to the de-sired position, so that the belt passesover the shoulder. Release the adjust-ment button j1 to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

O The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best foryou. Failure to do so may reduce the ef-fectiveness of the entire restraintsystem and increase the chance or se-verity of injury in an accident.SSS0368


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder arm can be adjusted toallow easier access to the shoulder belt.The arm can also be folded down to allowrear seat passengers easier access.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving posi-tion, it is not possible to properly fit thelap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex-tender is available. The extender adds ap-proximately 8 inches (200 mm) of lengthand may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See an

INFINITI dealer for assistance if the ex-tender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI seat belt extenders,made by the same company whichmade the original equipment seatbelts, should be used with INFINITIseat belts.

O Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

O Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings,apply a mild soap solution or any so-lution recommended for cleaning up-holstery or carpets. Then brush the

webbing, wipe it with a cloth andallow it to dry in the shade. Do not al-low the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

O Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flex-ible wires and anchors work properly.If loose parts, deterioration, cuts orother damage on the webbing isfound, the entire belt assembly shouldbe replaced.

SSS0222


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not pos-sible for even the strongest adult to re-sist the forces of a severe accident. Thechild could be crushed between theadult and parts of the vehicle. Also, donot put the same seat belt around bothyour child and yourself.

O Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental air bag could seriouslyinjure or kill your child. A rear-facingchild restraint must only be used in therear seat.

O INFINITI recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

O An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

In general, child restraints are designedto be installed with the lap portion of alap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, thisvehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred toas the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system. Some child re-straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these lower anchors. For de-tails, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) SYSTEM” later inthis section.Child restraints for infants and children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manu-facturers. When selecting any child re-straint, keep the following points in mind:

O Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your ve-hicle to be sure it is compatible withthe vehicle’s seat and seat beltsystem.

O If the child restraint is compatiblewith your vehicle, place your child inthe child restraint and check thevarious adjustments to be sure thechild restraint is compatible with yourchild. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height andweight. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All US states and Canadian provinces re-quire that infants and small children berestrained in approved child restraints atall times while the vehicle is being oper-ated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injuryfor both the child and other occupants

CHILD RESTRAINTS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

of the vehicle.

O Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

O If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

O After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Pushit from side to side. Try to tug it for-ward and check to see if the belt holdsthe restraint in place. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 in(25 mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or putthe restraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints

fit in all types of vehicles.

O If you must install a front-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see “Childrestraint installation on front passengerseat” later in this section.

O When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the child restraint.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON REAR SEAT CENTER OROUTBOARD POSITIONS

WARNING

O The three-point seat belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with an automaticlocking mode retractor which must beused when installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the automatic lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front-facing

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow thesesteps:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback. Ifnecessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraintfit. See “Head restraint” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to in-stall the head restraint when the child re-straint is removed. If the seating positiondoes not have an adjustable head re-straint and it is interfering with the properchild restraint fit, try another seating po-sition or a different child restraint.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for beltrouting.

SSS0252ARear outboard seat

SSS0278Rear center seat

SSS0253G


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all ofthe belt is fully extended. At this time,the belt retractor is in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts back to emergency lockingmode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on thebelt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug itforward to make sure that it is se-curely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 in (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 in (25 mm),pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-ther tighten the child restraint. If un-able to properly secure the restraint,move the restraint to another rearseating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

SSS0254H SSS0332C SSS0333C


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

matic locking mode by trying to pullmore belt out of the retractor. If youcannot pull any more belt webbing outof the retractor, the belt is in the auto-matic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use. If the belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt is allowed to wind back intothe retractor, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled; theseat belt only locks during a sudden stopor impact.

Rear-facing

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow thesesteps:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0256ARear outboard seat

SSS0279Rear center seat


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X



4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on thebelt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0335 SSS0258A SSS0259A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug itforward to make sure that it is se-curely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 in (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 in (25 mm),pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-ther tighten the child restraint. If un-able to properly secure the restraint,move the restraint to another rearseating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

matic locking mode by trying to pullmore belt out of the retractor. If youcannot pull any more belt webbing outof the retractor, the belt is in the auto-matic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use. If the belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt is allowed to wind back intothe retractor, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled; theseat belt only locks during a sudden stopor impact.

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS ANDTETHERS FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM1. LATCH lower anchor points (right)2. LATCH lower anchor points (left)3. LATCH label

WARNING

O Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown.If a child restraint is not secured prop-erly, your child could be seriously in-jured or killed in an accident.

SSS0260A SSS0369Sedan


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH system anchors. The child re-straint will not be secured properly.

O The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at

certain seating positions in your vehicle.This system is known as the LATCH (LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren) system.This system may also be referred to asthe ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to usea vehicle seat belt to secure the child re-straint. Your vehicle is equipped with spe-cial anchor points that are used withLATCH system compatible child restraints.Check your child restraint for a label stat-ing that it is compatible with the LATCHsystem. This information may also be inthe child restraint owner’s manual. If youhave such a child restraint, refer to the il-lustration for the rear seating positionsequipped with LATCH system anchorswhich can be used to secure the child re-straint.

The LATCH system anchors are located atthe rear of the seat cushion near the seat-back. A label is attached to the seatbackto help you locate the LATCH system an-chors.

Some child restraints may also requirethe use of a top tether strap. See “Toptether strap child restraint” later in thissection for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

When you install a LATCH system compat-ible child restraint to the lower anchor at-tachments in the rear seat, follow thesesteps.

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor area andfeeling to make sure there are no obstruc-tions over the LATCH system anchors, suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushion mate-rial. The child restraint will not be securedproperly if the LATCH system anchors areobstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compat-ible child restraint, adjust the heightof the child restraint LATCH system an-chor attachments to the anchor pointson the rear seat.

2. Insert the anchor attachments into theanchor points. If the child restraint isequipped with a top tether, see “Toptether strap child restraint” later in

SSS0370Coupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

this section for installation instruc-tions.

3. After attaching the child restraint andbefore placing the child in it, use forceto push the child restraint from side toside and tug it forward to make surethat the child restraint is securely heldin place. It should not move morethan 1 in (25 mm).

4. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

WARNING

O Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

O After removing a rear seat head re-straint for top tether installation, storeit securely to prevent it from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident. Always replace it and adjustproperly when top tether is no longer inuse.

If your child restraint has a top tetherstrap, it must be secured to the anchorpoint provided behind its position.

First, adjust the seatback so that it is up-right (if so equipped). Remove the anchor

SSS0281ASedan

SSS0282Coupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

cover from the anchor point as illustrated.Keep the removed cover in a secure placeto prevent loss or damage. Then securethe child restraint with the rear seat beltor the LATCH system (outboard positions),as applicable.

Remove the head restraint from the seat-back, if equipped with an adjustable rearhead restraint. Store it in a secure place.Position the top tether strap over the topof the seatback and secure it to the tetheranchor bracket that provides the straight-est installation. Tighten the tether strapaccording to the manufacturer’s instruc-tion to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the childrestraint installation instructions in thissection and the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-cel shelf finisher.

If you have any questions when in-stalling a top strap child restraint on therear seat, consult an INFINITI dealer fordetails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

O Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear-facing child restraintcould be struck by the supplementalfront air bag in a crash and could seri-ously injure or kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a front-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

SSS0300A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

O The three-point seat belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with an automaticlocking mode retractor which must beused when installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, itcan change the operation of the frontpassenger air bag. See “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

Front-facing

If you must install a child restraint in thefront seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on thefront passenger seat. It should beplaced in a front-facing direction only.Move the seat to the rearmost posi-tion. Adjust the head restraint to itshighest position. Always follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions. Child restraints for infants mustbe used in the rear-facing directionand therefore must not be used in thefront seat.

The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If necessary, adjust or removethe head restraint to obtain the cor-rect child restraint fit. See “Head re-straint adjustment” earlier in this sec-tion. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure toinstall the head restraint when thechild restraint is removed. If the seat-ing position does not have an adjust-able head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, tryanother seating position or a differentchild restraint.SSS0301B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X



4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upjA on the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

SSS0360 SSS0361 SSS0331C


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug itforward to make sure that it is se-curely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 inch (25 mm),pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-ther tighten the child restraint. If un-able to properly secure the restraint,move the restraint to another rearseating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pullmore belt out of the retractor. If youcannot pull any more belt webbing outof the retractor, the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use. If the seat belt is notlocked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

8. Turn the ignition to the ON position.The passenger air bag status lightshould say “OFF”. If this light is not il-luminated, it may indicate a malfunc-tion. Move the child restraint to an-other seating position. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITIdealer.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-matic locking mode (child restraint mode)will be canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not pos-sible for even the strongest adult to re-sist the forces of a severe accident. Thechild could be crushed between theadult and parts of the vehicle. Also, donot put the same seat belt around bothyour child and yourself.

O INFINITI recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

SSS0302E

BOOSTER SEATS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

O An improperly installed booster seatcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

WARNING

Do not use towels, books, pillows or otheritems in place of a booster seat. Itemssuch as these may move during normaldriving or a collision and result in seriousinjury or death. Booster seats are designedto be used with a lap/shoulder belt.Booster seats are designed to properlyroute the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt over the strongest portions of a

child’s body to provide the maximum pro-tection during a collision.

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the followingpoints in mind:

O Choose only a booster seat with alabel certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

O Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the ve-hicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0455


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Make sure the child’s head will beproperly supported by the boosterseat or vehicle seat. The seatbackmust be at or above the center of thechild’s ears. For example, if a low backbooster seat j1 is chosen, the vehicleseatback must be at or above the cen-ter of the child’s ears. If the seatbackis lower than the center of the child’sears, a high back booster seat j2should be used.

O If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thebooster seat and check the variousadjustments to be sure the booster

seat is compatible with your child. Al-ways follow all recommended proce-dures.

All U.S. states and provinces of Canadarequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraintat all times while the vehicle is being op-erated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a booster seat can in-crease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

O Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be pos-sible to properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

O If the booster seat and seat belt arenot used properly, the risk of a childbeing injured in a collision or a suddenstop greatly increases.

SSS0387 SSS0388


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

O After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neckand the lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

O Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation onfront passenger seat” later in this sec-tion.

O When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Check

the seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the booster seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONREAR SEAT CENTER OR OUTBOARDPOSITIONS

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts. When you install abooster seat in the rear seat, follow thesesteps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat.

SSS0389Outboard position


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Only place it in a front-facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraintadjustment” earlier in this section. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the boosterseat is removed. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering with the

proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different boosterseat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seatbelt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPESEAT BELTS” earlier in this section.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONFRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that child restraintsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position.

If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, follow these steps:

SSS0390Center position

LRS0454


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Move the seat to the rearmost posi-tion.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraintadjustment” earlier in this section. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the boosterseat is removed. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering with theproper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different boosterseat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seatbelt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPESEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR” earlierin this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important informationconcerning the driver and passenger frontimpact supplemental air bags (INFINITIAir Bag System), front seat side-impactsupplemental air bags, curtain air bagsand front seat pre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front impact air bagsystem: The INFINITI air bag system canhelp cushion the impact force to the headand chest of the driver and front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the chest area of thedriver and front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the ve-hicle is impacted.Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants infront and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The cur-tain side-impact air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

These supplemental restraint systems aredesigned to supplement the crash protec-tion provided by the driver and passengerseat belts and are not a substitute forthem. Seat belts should always be cor-rectly worn and the occupant seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and door fin-ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in thissection for instructions and precautionson seat belt usage.)

After turning the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the systems areoperational. WARNING

O The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Also,the front passenger air bag will not in-flate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit. Always wear your seat beltsto help reduce the risk or severity of in-jury in various kinds of accidents.

O The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. Supplemental front air bagsinflate with great force. Even with theINFINITI air bag system, if you are un-restrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way,you are at greater risk of injury ordeath in a crash. You may also receiveserious or fatal injuries from thesupplemental front air bag if you are up

SSS0131B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

against it when it inflates. Always sitback against the seatback and as faraway as practical from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Always usethe seat belts.

O The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sensorsthat detect if the seat belts are fas-tened. The air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failureto properly wear seat belts can in-crease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

O The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(weight sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under some con-ditions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

O Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0132B SSS0006

SSS0007


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the previous illustrations.

O Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

O Even with the INFINITI Air Bag System,never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. For addi-tional information, see “Child re-straints” earlier in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

O The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk or se-verity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

O The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact airbags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate with great force.Do not allow anyone to place theirhand, leg or face near the side air bagon the side of the seatback of the frontseat or near the side roof rails. Do notallow anyone sitting in the front seatsor rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean againstthe door. Some examples of dangerousriding positions are shown in the previ-ous illustrations.

O When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be especiallycareful with children, who should al-ways be properly restrained.

O Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS0059A SSS0188A SSS0140


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0159 SSS0162


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI air bag system (frontseats)

1. Crash zone sensor2. Supplemental front air bag modules3. Supplemental side air bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensor5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag modules

7. Diagnosis sensor unit8. Seat belt pre-tensioner9. Satellite sensors10. Occupant classification system con-

trol unit

SSS0416Sedan


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

This vehicle is equipped with theINFINITI air bag system for the driver andfront passenger seats. This system is de-signed to meet certification requirementsunder U.S. regulations. It is also per-mitted in Canada. However, all of the in-

formation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The driver supplemental air bag is locatedin the center of the steering wheel; thefront passenger supplemental air bag ismounted in the instrument panel above

the glove box. The front air bags are de-signed to inflate in higher severity frontalcollisions, although they may inflate if theforces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severityfrontal impact. They may not inflate incertain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage(or lack of it) is not always an indicationof proper supplemental air bag operation.

The INFINITI air bag system has dualstage inflators for both the driver andpassenger air bags. The system monitorsinformation from the crash zone sensor,the diagnosis sensor unit, seat beltbuckle switches, occupant classificationsensor (weight sensor) and passengerseat belt tension sensor. Inflator opera-tion is based on the severity of a collisionand whether the seat belts are beingused. For the front passenger, it addition-ally monitors the weight of an occupant orobject on the seat and seat belt tension.Based on information from the sensors,only one front air bag may inflate in acrash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants arebelted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automaticallyturned OFF under some conditions, de-

SSS0418Coupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

pending on the weight detected on thepassenger seat and how the seat belt isused. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, the passenger air bag status lightwill be illuminated. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in this sec-tion for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper per-formance of the system. If you have anyquestions about the performance of yourair bag system, please contact anINFINITI dealer.

When the supplemental front air bag in-flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smokeis not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it,as it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing condi-tion should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the face and chest of thefront occupants. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

Even with INFINITI air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driverand passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the steering wheel orinstrument panel. The supplemental frontair bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occu-pant is too close to, or is against the airbag module during inflation. The air bagwill deflate quickly after a collision. Thesupplemental front air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.

Front passenger air bag and status light:

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some condi-tions. Read this section carefully to learnhow it operates. Proper use of the seat,seat belt and child restraints is necessaryfor most effective protection. Failure to fol-low all instructions in this manual concern-ing the use of seats, seat belts and child

SSS0367Front passenger air bag status light


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

restraints can increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

The right front passenger air bag statuslight is located in the center display. Thelight operates as follows:

Unoccupied passenger seat or when otherconditions are met as outlined in this sec-tion: The light illuminates to indicate thatthe front passenger air bag is OFF and willnot inflate in a crash.

Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light does not illuminate toindicate that the front passenger air bagis operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle isoperated under some conditions as de-scribed below as permitted by U.S. regu-lations. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, it will not inflate in a crash. Thedriver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by re-quiring the air bag to be automaticallyturned OFF. Certain sensors are used tomeet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classifi-cation sensor (weight sensor). It is in thebottom of the front passenger seatcushion and is designed to detect an oc-cupant and objects on the seat by weight.It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child isin the front passenger seat, the air bagsystem is designed to turn the passengerair bag OFF. Also, if a child restraint of thetype specified in the regulations is on theseat, its weight and the child’s weight canbe detected and cause the air bag to turnOFF. Weight sensor operation can vary de-pending on the front passenger seat beltsensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors aredesigned to detect if the seat belt isbuckled and the amount of tension on theseat belt, such as when it is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraint mode).Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the weight sensor and the belt tensiondetected on the seat belt, the air bag sys-tem determines whether the front passen-

ger air bag should be automaticallyturned OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seatbelt as outlined in this manual should notcause the passenger air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. For small adults itmay be turned OFF. Also, if the occupanttakes his/her weight off the seat cushion(for example, by not sitting upright, bysitting on an edge of the seat, or by oth-erwise being out of position), this couldcause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.In addition, if the occupant improperlyuses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), thiscould cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearingthe seat belt properly for the most effec-tive protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. INFINITI also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat.If this is not possible, the weight sensorand seat belt sensors are designed to op-erate as described above to turn the frontpassenger air bag OFF for specified child


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

restraints. Failing to properly secure childrestrains and to use the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode) may allow therestraint to tip or move in an accident orsudden stop. This can also result in thepassenger air bag inflating in a crash in-stead of being OFF. See “Child restraints”later in this section for proper use and in-stallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occu-pied, the passenger air bag is designednot to inflate in a crash. However, heavyobjects placed on the seat could result inair bag inflation, because of the object’sweight detected by the weight sensor.Other conditions could also result in airbag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two childrenare on the seat, contrary to the instruc-tions in this manual. Always be sure thatyou and all vehicle occupants are seatedand restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag is automatically turnedOFF. The light will illuminate (indicatingthe air bag is OFF and will not inflate)when the front passenger seat is not oc-cupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and thepassenger air bag status light is illumi-nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a smalladult, or is not sitting on the seat or notusing the seat belt properly. If a child re-straint must be used in the front seat, butthe status light is not lit (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), itcould be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. If suchsituations happen, properly position andrestrain the occupant or child restraint.Otherwise reposition the occupant orchild restraint in a rear seat.

If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-senger air bag system, the supplementalair bag warning light , located in themeter and gauges area will blink. Havethe system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

Other supplemental front air bagprecautions:

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place any ob-jects between any occupant and thesteering wheel or instrument panel.Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury if thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

O Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. Thisis to prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

O Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat. Additionally, do notstow any objects under the front pas-senger seat or the seat cushion andseatback. Such objects may interferewith the proper operation of the occu-pant classification system (weightsensor).

O No unauthorized changes should be-made to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affectthe supplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.

O Work around and on the supplementalfront air bag system should be done byan INFINITI dealer. Installation ofelectrical equipment should also bedone by an INFINITI dealer. The yellowand orange Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring and connectorsshould not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the air bag system.

O A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect function of the supplemental airbag system.

O The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about thesupplemental front air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sec-tions in this Owner’s Manual.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bagsystems

The supplemental side air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback ofthe front seats. The supplemental curtainside-impact air bags are located in theside roof rails. These systems are de-signed to meet voluntary guidelines tohelp reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings inthis manual still apply and must be fol-lowed. The supplemental side air bags

and curtain side-impact air bags are de-signed to inflate in higher severity sidecollisions on the side of the vehicle im-pacted, although they may inflate if theforces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity sideimpact. They are designed to inflate onthe side where the vehicle is impacted.They may not inflate in certain side colli-sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notalways an indication of proper supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairlyloud noise may be heard, followed by re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the chest of the front oc-cupants. Curtain side-impact air bagshelp to cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions. They can helpsave lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag may causeabrasions or other injuries. Supplementalside air bags and curtain side-impact airbags do not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from theside air bag. Rear seat passengers shouldbe seated as far away as practical fromthe door finishers and side roof rails. Theside air bags and curtain side-impact airbag inflate quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

After turning the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0190


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the side air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem components will be hot. Do nottouch them; you may severely burnyourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag or damageto the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplementalsystem may result in serious personalinjury. For example, do not change thefront seats by placing material near theseatback or by installing additionaltrim material, such as seat covers,around the side air bag.

O Work around and on the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by an INFINITIdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses are coveredwith yellow insulation either just beforethe harness connectors or over thecomplete harness for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem and guide the buyer to the appro-priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system(For front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damage


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

to the pre-tensioner seat belt opera-tion. Tampering with the pre-tensionerseat belt system may result in seriouspersonal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by an INFINITIdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by anINFINITI dealer. Unauthorized elec-trical test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

O If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contactan INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are setforth in the appropriate INFINITI Ser-vice Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-dures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem activates in conjunction with the frontsupplemental air bag systems. Workingwith the seat belt retractor, it helpstighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with theseat belt’s retractor. These seat belts areused the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-vates, smoke is released and a loud noisemay be heard. The smoke is not harmful,but care should be taken not to inhale itas it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing condi-tion should get fresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner seat belt system, the supple-mental air bag warning light will notcome on, will flash intermittently or willturn on for 7 seconds and remain on afterthe ignition switch has been turned to theON or START position. In this case, thepre-tensioner seat belt may not functionproperly. They must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplementalair bag system are placed in the vehicleas shown in the illustration.

j1 SRS air bagThe warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visors.

j2 SRS side-impact air bagThe warning label is located on theside of the passenger’s side centerpillar.

SSS0330


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systems,and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuitsmonitored by the air bag warning light arethe diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sen-sors, crash zone sensor, front air bagmodules, side air bag modules, curtainside-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seatbelt and all related wiring.

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supplemen-tal air bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt need servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalfront air bags, supplemental side airbags, curtain side-impact air bags and/orpre-tensioner seat belt may not operateproperly. They must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems and/orpre-tensioner seat belt systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts aredesigned to activate on a one-time-onlybasis. As a reminder, unless it is dam-aged, the supplemental air bag warninglight will remain illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese systems should be done only by anINFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required onthe vehicle, the supplemental front airbags, side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags, related parts and pre-tensioner

SPA1097


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

seat belt should be pointed out to theperson conducting the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be in theLOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bagmodule and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be replaced by anINFINITI dealer. The air bag moduleand pre-tensioner seat belt system can-not be repaired.

O The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystems, and the pre-tensioner seatbelt system should be inspected by anINFINITI dealer if there is any damageto the front end or side portion of thevehicle.

O If you need to dispose of these supple-mental systems or scrap the vehicle,contact an INFINITI dealer.

Correct disposal procedures are setforth in the appropriate INFINITI Ser-vice Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-dures could cause personal injury.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ............................................. 2-2Meters and gauges........................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-3Tachometer ................................................. 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-4Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5

Compass display .............................................. 2-6Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders......................................................... 2-9

Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-9Warning lights ............................................ 2-9Indicator lights ......................................... 2-14Audible reminders..................................... 2-15

Security systems ............................................ 2-16Vehicle security system............................. 2-16INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ....... 2-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-19Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................................ 2-20Headlight and turn signal switch.................... 2-20

Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-20Headlight switch ....................................... 2-21Turn signal switch..................................... 2-24Fog light switch ........................................ 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch ....................... 2-24Horn............................................................... 2-25Heated seats .................................................. 2-25SNOW mode switch (if so equipped) .............. 2-27Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch........ 2-27Clock.............................................................. 2-28

Adjusting the time .................................... 2-28Power outlet................................................... 2-28Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-29

Front ......................................................... 2-29Rear .......................................................... 2-30

Storage .......................................................... 2-30Instrument pocket (Except for Navigationsystem equipped models) ......................... 2-30Sunglasses holder ................................... 2-31Cup holder ................................................ 2-31Glove box.................................................. 2-33Upper glove box (Except for Navigationsystem equipped models) ......................... 2-34Console box .............................................. 2-34Rear armrest pocket.................................. 2-35Card holder (Driver’s side)......................... 2-36Coat hook (Coupe) .................................... 2-36Stowing golf bags ..................................... 2-36

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Windows ........................................................ 2-37Power windows ......................................... 2-37Automatic adjusting function (Coupe)........ 2-39

Sunroof (if so equipped)................................. 2-39Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-39

Interior lights................................................. 2-41Room light ................................................ 2-41Map light .................................................. 2-42Rear personal light .................................. 2-43

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)................. 2-43Trunk light...................................................... 2-44HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if soequipped)....................................................... 2-44

Programming HomeLink .......................... 2-45Programming HomeLink for Canadiancustomers ................................................. 2-46Operating the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver................................................ 2-46Programming trouble diagnosis ................ 2-46Clearing the programmed information....... 2-47Reprogramming a single HomeLinkbutton....................................................... 2-47If your vehicle is stolen ............................ 2-47

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch

2. Security indicator3. Steering switch for audio control4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn5. Meters/gauges6. Cruise control main/set switch

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch8. Center ventilator9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Pas-senger air bag status light

10. Rear window and outside mirror de-fogger switch

11. Heater/air conditioner control12. Clock13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)14. Passenger supplemental air bag15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-

tion system equipped models)16. Side window defogger17. Side ventilator18. Hood lock release handle19. Trunk lid release switch20. VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control) OFF

switch21. Instrument brightness control switch22. Outside mirror remote control23. Fuse box24. Automatic steering column control (if

so equipped)25. Manual steering column control26. Ignition switch/steering lock27. Snow mode switch (if so equipped)28. Radio/CD player29. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter30. Heated seat switch31. Hazard warning flasher switch32. Glove box*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SIC2792

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Automatic transmission position indi-

cator (AT models)/Up-shift indicator(MT models)

4. Speedometer

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Reset knob for trip odometer

7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)/Up-shift in-dicator setting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Up-shift indicator setting (MTmodels)

The odometer j1 /twin trip odometer orup-shift indicator setting (MT models) j2are displayed when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

SSI0075

SIC2559

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset knob j3 changes thedisplay as follows.

AT models:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

MT models:

TRIP A → TRIP B → Up-shift indicator set-ting mode → TRIP A

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Start-ing and driving” section for the use of theup-shift indicator.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset knob for more than 1second resets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm). Do not revthe engine into the red zone jA .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature.

The engine coolant temperature is withinthe normal range jA when the gaugeneedle points within the zone shown inthe illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will varywith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

SIC2560 SIC2561


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If gauge is over the normalrange, stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for immediate actionrequired.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hill.

The gauge needle is designed to move tothe E (Empty) position when the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters Empty.

The low fuel warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is getting low. Refuelas soon as it is convenient, preferably be-fore the gauge reaches E. There will be asmall reserve of fuel in the tank when thefuel gauge needle reaches E.

The indicates that the fuel filler lid islocated on the passenger’s side of the ve-hicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips, the

lamp should turn off. If the lampremains on after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer.

O For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator lamp (MIL)” later inthis section.

SIC2562


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push COMP switch jA to turn the displayon or off when the ignition switch is inthe ON position. The heading directionwill be displayed.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

m: vehicle direction

The above example shows the displaychanges from “East” to “East-southeast”.

If the compass unit does not receive anycorrect signal for 10 minutes, the com-pass will display the bar “-- -- --”. Havethe vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer.

SIC2563

COMPASS DISPLAY


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to causefalse compass readings. Follow these in-structions to set the variance for your par-ticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zonemap jA . Record your zone number.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition while pressing the COMPswitch.

3. Continue to press the COMP switch formore than 5 seconds until the currentzone entry number is displayed on thecompass.

If any operations are not carried out formore than 5 seconds, the display showsdirection as normal.

4. Press COMP switch repeatedly untilthe new zone entry number is dis-played.

Once the desired zone number is dis-played, stop pressing the COMP switchand the display will show compass direc-tion within a few seconds.SIC2243A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a magnet is located near the driverside instrument panel (the sensor is lo-cated inside) or the vehicle is drivenwhere the terrestrial magnetism is dis-turbed, the compass display may not in-dicate the correct direction.

O The compass may not display correctlyat the following places:• under a bridge• among buildings• on an iron bridge• inside a tunnel• above a subway• on a railway crossing• in an underground parking lot• near a huge vehicle• near a transformer substationIf you carry out correction procedureat one of the above places, the proce-dure may not be completed correctly.

O If air conditioner fan speed ismaximum, the compass display mayshake. This is normal. Reduce the fanspeed to avoid shaking the display.

Correction functions of thecompass display

If the direction is not shown correctly,carry out correction procedure set out be-low.

Correction procedure

1. Push COMP switch for about 10 sec-onds. The direction bar starts blinking.

2. Turn off electrical equipment such aslights, hazard indicator, air condi-tioner, etc. Then drive the vehicleslowly (less than 3 MPH (5 km/h)) andturn the vehicle one or more times inan open and safe area. When the com-pass displays the direction, the proce-dure is completed.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

or Anti-lock brake warning light Low fuel warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

Automatic transmission check warninglight

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

All wheel drive (AWD) warning light (AWDmodels)

Low washer fluid warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

or Brake warning lightP position selecting warning light (if soequipped)

Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning lightSnow mode indicator light (if soequipped)

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning lightAutomatic transmission position indicatorlight

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indica-tor light

Intelligent Key warning light (if soequipped)

Cruise main switch indicator light

CHECKING BULBSApply the parking brake and turn the igni-tion key to ON without starting the en-gine. The following lights will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly andthen go off:

, or , , , ,, ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indi-cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuitin the electrical system. Have the systemrepaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakewarning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the anti-lock

brake system is not functioning properly.Have the system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system,the anti-lock function will cease but theordinary brakes will continue to operatenormally.See “Anti-lock brake system” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

If the light comes on while you are

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

driving, contact an INFINITI dealer forrepair.

Automatic transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the light comes on for 2 seconds. If thelight blinks for approximately 8 seconds,it may indicate the automatic transmis-sion system is not functioning properly.Have an INFINITI dealer check and repairthe transmission.

AWD (All wheel drive)warning light (AWD models)

The warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is turned to ON. Itturns off soon after the engine is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or thediameter of the front and the rear wheelsare different, the warning light will eitherremain illuminated or blink. See “AWDwarning light” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section.

CAUTION

O If the warning light comes on whiledriving there may be a malfunction in

the AWD system. Reduce the vehiclespeed and have your vehicle checkedby an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

O Do not drive on dry, hard surface roadsin the SNOW mode.

O If the AWD warning light blinks onwhen you are driving:

• blinks rapidly (about twice a second):Pull off the road in a safe area, andidle the engine. The driving modewill change to 2WD to prevent theAWD system from malfunctioning.If the warning light turns off, you candrive again.

• blinks slowly (about once every 2seconds):Pull off the road in a safe area, andidle the engine. Check that all tiresizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is still on after theabove operations, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine isrunning with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked by anINFINITI dealer.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed becausedriving it could be dangerous.

O Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is below theMIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir,do not drive until the brake system hasbeen checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the chargingsystem is not functioning properly. Turnthe engine off and check the alternatorbelt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing

or if the light remains on, see an INFINITIdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of thedoors are not closed securely while theignition switch is ON.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pres-sure. If the light flickers or comes on dur-ing normal driving, pull off the road in asafe area, stop the engine immediatelyand call an INFINITI dealer or other au-thorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level.See “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause seri-ous damage to the engine almost immedi-ately. Turn off the engine as soon as it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Key warninglight (for Intelligent Keysystem) (if so equipped)

This light comes on in green when it ispossible to turn the ignition knob.

When the light comes on in red, it is notpossible to turn the knob.

O The warning light blinks in red whenthe Intelligent Key is outside the ve-hicle with the ignition knob in the ACCor ON position. Confirm the location ofthe key as soon as possible when thewarning light blinks in red.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you while driving the vehicle.

O The warning light goes off about 10seconds after the Intelligent Key isbrought inside the vehicle.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

P position selecting warninglight (for Intelligent Keysystem) (if so equipped)

The light blinks in red when the selectorlever is not in the P position and you areoutside the vehicle with the IntelligentKey.

When the warning light blinks, move theselector lever to P position and return theignition knob to the LOCK position.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in thetank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuelgauge reaches E.

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-maining in the tank when the fuel gaugeneedle reaches E.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tankfluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid asnecessary. See “Window washer fluid” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Low tire pressure warninglight

After the ignition switch is turned ON, thislight comes on for about 1 second andturns off.

This light warns of low tire pressure.

INFINITI’s low tire pressure warningsystem is a tire pressure monitoringsystem. It monitors tire pressure of alltires except the spare. When the tire pres-sure monitoring system warning light islit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated. You should stopand check your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pressureas indicated on the vehicle’s tire informa-tion placard. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stoppingability. Each tire, including the spare,should be checked monthly when coldand set to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and owner’s manual.

The recommended inflation pressure may

also be found on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure (lower than 25 psi: Sedan 17inch and Coupe 17 inch wheel model / 27psi: Sedan 18 inch wheel model / 28 psi:Coupe 18 and 19 inch wheel model), thelight will illuminate and the chime willsound for about 10 seconds.

For additional information, see “Low tirepressure warning system” in the “5.Starting and driving” section and “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section.

WARNING

O If the light does not come on with thekey switch turned ON, have the vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soonas possible.

O If the light comes on while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location and


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Ad-just the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information labelto turn the low tire pressure warninglight OFF. If the light still comes onwhile driving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may be flat. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or awheel is replaced, the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

CAUTION

O The low tire pressure warning system isnot a substitute for the regular tirepressure check. Be sure to check thetire pressure regularly.

O If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the lowtire pressure warning system may notoperate correctly.

O Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenseat belts. The light illuminates wheneverthe ignition switch is turned to the ON po-sition, and will remain illuminated untilthe driver’s seat belt is fastened.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —Seats, restraints and supplemental re-straint system” section for precautions onseat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light will illuminate. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to your an INFINITI dealer.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-mental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function prop-erly. For additional information, see“Supplemental restraint system” in the“1. Safety — Seats, restraints and supple-


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems and/orpre-tensioner seat belt systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the indicator in the instru-ment panel shows the automatic trans-mission selector lever position. See “Driv-ing with automatic transmission” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.

Cruise main switchindicator light

The light comes on when the cruise con-trol main switch is pushed. The light goesout when the main switch is pushedagain. When the cruise main switch indi-cator light comes on, the cruise controlsystem is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehiclespeed is controlled by the cruise controlsystem. If the light blinks while the en-gine is running, it may indicate the cruisecontrol system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlighthigh beam is on and goes out when thelow beam is selected.

Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comeson steady or blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate a potential emis-sion control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may alsocome on steady if the fuel filler cap isloose or missing, or if the vehicle runs outof fuel. Check to make sure the fuel fillercap is installed and closed tightly, andthat the vehicle has at least three gallons(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lampshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator lamp comes on steady for20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-onds when the engine is not running, itindicates that the vehicle is not ready foran emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness forinspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will comeon in one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady— An emission control system mal-function has been detected. Check thefuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

loose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The lamp should turn off after afew driving trips. If the lampdoes not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the re-tailer.

O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking —An engine misfire has been detectedwhich may damage the emission con-trol system. To reduce or avoid emis-sion control system damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45MPH (72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-eration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.d) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp maystop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the re-tailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without havingthe emission control system checked andrepaired as necessary could lead to poordriveability, reduced fuel economy, andpossible damage to the emission controlsystem.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDCsystem or the traction control system isoperating, thus alerting the driver to thefact that the road surface is slippery andthe vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

Snow mode switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

When selecting SNOW mode while the en-gine is running, this light will illuminate.See “SNOW MODE SWITCH” in the “2. In-struments and controls” section.

Vehicle dynamic control(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dy-namic control off switch is pushed to OFF.

This indicates the vehicle dynamic controlsystem and traction control system arenot operating. When the vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicator light and slip indi-cator light come on with the vehicle dy-namic control system turned on, this lightalerts the driver to the fact that the ve-hicle dynamic control system’s fail-safemode is operating, i.e. the vehicle dy-namic control system may not be func-tioning properly. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer. If an ab-normality occurs in the system, the ve-hicle dynamic control system function willbe canceled but the vehicle is still drive-able. For additional information, see “Ve-hicle dynamic control (VDC) system” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The light flashes when the turn signalswitch lever or hazard switch is turnedon.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver’s sidedoor is opened while the key is left in the


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

ignition switch (ignition switch is turnedoff). Remove the key and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front dooris opened with the headlight switch onunless the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition.

Make sure to turn the light switch offwhen you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a brake pad requires re-placement, it will make a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound isheard.

Your vehicle has two types of securitysystems, as follows:

O Vehicle Security System

O Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown bythe security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides vi-sual and audible alarm signals ifsomeone opens the doors, hood, or trunklid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved orwhen a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the vehicle, andalways lock it when unattended. Be awareof your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. An INFINITI dealer may alsooffer such equipment. Check with your in-surance company to see if you may be eli-gible for discounts for various theft pro-tection features.

SIC2132

SECURITY SYSTEMS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

How to activate the vehiclesecurity system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be activated even if thewindows are open.

2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

3. Close and lock all doors, hood andtrunk lid.

Lock all doors by pressing the LOCKbutton on the keyfob, the IntelligentKey or by pushing any front door

handle request switch or turning thedoor key. When using the remote key-less entry, the hazard indicators willoperate as shown in “Remote keylessentry system” or “Intelligent Keysystem” in the “3. Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicatorlight jA comes on. The SECURITY indi-cator light glows for about 30 secondsand then blinks. The system is nowactivated. If, during this 30 secondtime period, the door is unlocked bythe key or the remote keyless entry, orthe ignition switch is turned to ACC orON, the system will not activate.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will acti-vate with all doors, hood and trunk lidlocked and ignition switch off. Turn theignition switch to ACC to turn off the sys-tem.

Vehicle security system operation

The security system will give the followingalarm:

O The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 50 seconds. However,the alarm reactivates if the vehicle istampered with again. The alarm canbe shut off by unlocking a door withthe key, by pushing any front doorhandle request switch or by pressingthe UNLOCK button on the keyfob orIntelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

O Opening the door without using thekey or keyfob or Intelligent Key.

O Opening the trunk lid without usingthe keyfob or Intelligent Key.

O Opening the hood.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking adoor with the key, by pushing any doorhandle request switch or by pressing theUNLOCK button on keyfob or IntelligentKey. The alarm will not stop if the ignitionswitch is turned to ACC or ON.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

SIC2564


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If the engine fails to start using the regis-tered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey, it may be due to interference causedby another Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key, an automated toll road de-vice or automated payment device on thekey ring. Restart the engine using the fol-lowing procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing

the registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobi-lizer System key on a separate keyring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-TURE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCECOULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TOOPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

If Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, indicator light jA will re-main on while the ignition switch is in theON position.

If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, see an INFINITIdealer for Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem service as soon as possible.Please bring all Infiniti Vehicle Immobi-lizer System keys that you have whenvisiting an INFINITI dealer for service.

SIC2564


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The windshield wiper and washer oper-ates when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiperat the following speed:

j1 Intermittent — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knobtoward jA (Slower) or jB (Faster). Also,the intermittent operation speed variesin accordance with the vehicle speed.(For example, when the vehicle speedis high, the intermittent operationspeed will be faster.)

j2 Low — continuous low speed opera-tion

j3 High — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up j4 to have one sweepoperation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you j5 to operatethe washer. Then the wiper will also oper-ate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-scure your vision which may lead to an ac-cident. Warm the windshield with the de-froster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

The following could damage the washersystem:

O Do not operate the washer continuouslyfor more than 30 seconds.

O Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

SIC2821

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

To defog/defrost the rear window glassand outside mirrors, start the engine andpush the switch on j1 . The indicator lightjA will come on. Push the switch again toturn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have yourxenon headlights replaced at anINFINITI dealer.

O Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of youand cause a serious accident. If head-lights are not aimed correctly, immedi-ately take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer and have the headlights ad-justed correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initiallyturned on, its brightness or color variesslightly. However, the color and bright-ness will soon stabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not toturn off the headlights for short inter-vals (for example, when the vehiclestops at a traffic signal). Even whenthe daytime running lights are active(Canada only), the xenon headlightsdo not turn on. This way the life of thexenon headlights is not reduced.

O If a xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will dras-tically decrease, the light will startblinking, or the color of the light willbecome reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact anINFINITI dealer.

SIC2565

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

j1 Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument lights willcome on.

j2 Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all theother lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine runningto avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the head-lights to be set so they turn on and offautomatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is inthe AUTO j1 position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

SIC2227Type A

SIC2228Type B

SIC2229Autolight system


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

switch to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on theheadlights automatically when it is dark,turn off the headlights when it is light,and keep the headlights on for up to 45seconds after you turn the key to OFF andopen any door then close all the doors.

If the ignition switch is turned OFF andone of the doors is opened and this con-dition is continued, the headlights remainON for five minutes.

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor jA located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. Thephoto sensor controls the autolamp; if itis covered, the photo sensor reacts as ifit is dark and the headlights will illumi-nate.

Headlight beam select

j1 To select the low beam, put the leverin the neutral position as shown.

j2 To select the high beam, push thelever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select thelow beam.

j3 Pulling the lever toward you will flashthe headlight high beam.

SIC1230C SIC2230


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Battery saver system

O When the headlight switch is in theor position while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, thelights (including the front fog light)will automatically turn off 5 minutesafter the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position.

O When the headlight switch remains inthe or position after thelights automatically turn off, the lightswill turn on for 5 minutes when theheadlight switch is turned to the OFFposition and then turned to the

or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature auto-matically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate ata reduced intensity when the engine isstarted with the parking brake released.The daytime running lights operate withthe headlight switch in the OFF positionor in the position. Turn the headlightswitch to the position for full illumi-nation when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime runninglights do not illuminate. The daytime run-ning lights illuminate once the parkingbrake is released. The daytime runninglights will remain on until the ignitionswitch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and others.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control oper-ates when the light switch is in the AUTO,

or position. Turn the control tojA direction (darken) or jB direction(brighten) to adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel (except power windowswitch lights).

When the control is turned upward until itstops, the light intensity will be atmaximum. When the control is turneddownward until it stops, the light will beturned off.

SIC2566


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

j1 Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-cally.

j2 Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to the point where lightsbegin flashing.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-light switch to the position, thenturn the switch to the position. Toturn them off, turn the switch to the OFFposition.

The headlights must be on and the lowbeams selected for the fog lights to oper-ate. The fog lights automatically turn offwhen the high beam headlights are se-lected.

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lightswill flash.

Some state or provincial laws may pro-hibit the use of the hazard warningflasher switch while driving.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, be sureto move the vehicle well off the road.

SIC2231 SIC1836A SIC2574

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

O Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the igni-tion switch either off or on.

To sound the horn, push on or near thehorn marks of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of the supple-mental front air bag system. Tamperingwith the supplemental front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.

The front seats are warmed by built-inheaters. The switches located on the cen-ter console can be operated indepen-dently (driver side seat jA and front pas-senger seat jB ) of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

j1 For low heat, push the (Low)side of the switch.

j2 For high heat, push the(High) side of the switch.

j3 For no heat, the switch has a cen-

SIC1838 SIC2793AT models

HORN HEATED SEATS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

ter OFF position between low andhigh.

The indicator light in the switch jC willilluminate when low or high is se-lected.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,or before you leave the vehicle, besure to turn the switch to the off posi-tion (center) j3 .

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

O Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

O Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or simi-lar object. This may result in damage tothe heater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

O If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

SIC2672MT models


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

For driving or starting the vehicle onsnowy roads or slippery areas, push theSNOW mode switch to the “ON” positionand then the indicator light in the switchand the SNOW indicator light in the in-strument panel will illuminate.When the SNOW mode is activated, en-gine output is controlled to reduce wheelspin.

CAUTION

When turning the vehicle in SNOW mode on

paved roads, you may feel a braking effect.This is a normal condition of the AWDmodel.

The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ONfor most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

SIC2660 SIC1881

SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFSWITCH


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn ON the system. See“Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

To set the time forward, push the buttonj1 .

To set the time backward push the buttonj2 .

The power outlet is for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

O The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

O This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

O Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) powerdraw. Do not use double adapters or

SIC2568 SIC1840BAutomatic transmission model

CLOCK POWER OUTLET


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

more than one electrical accessory.

O Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

O Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

O Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

O Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

O When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

FRONT

To open the ashtray, push j1 .

To take out the ashtray, pull out j2 .

The cigarette lighter operates when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”position. To heat the cigarette lighter,push in j3 until it latches. When thelighter is heated, it will spring out auto-matically.

Return the cigarette lighter to its originalposition after use.

SIC2673Manual transmission models

SIC2569

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

REAR

To open the ashtray, pull j1 .

To take out the ashtray, push down j2 ,and pull out.

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter elementonly. The use of the cigarette lighter socketas a power source for any other accessoryis not recommended. Do not use any otherpower outlet for an accessory lighter.

INSTRUMENT POCKET (Except forNavigation system equippedmodels)

WARNING

The instrument pocket should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

SIC2570 SIC2815

STORAGE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SUNGLASSES HOLDERThe sunglasses holder can be opened bypushing the button jA .

WARNING

O The sunglasses holder should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other than sun-glasses.

O Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

Front (Automatic transmission models):

To open the cup holder, push the lid j1 .

For larger cups, remove the inside trayj2 .

SIC1971 SIC2571Automatic transmission models — Front


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front (Manual transmission models):

To set up the cup holder, slide the lid j1rearward and insert the partition plateinto the center slit j2 .

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in an acci-dent.

SIC2674Manual transmission models — Front

SIC2675Manual transmission models — Console box

SIC1846BRear


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

The bottle holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handlej1 .

To close, push the lid in until the locklatches.

To lock j2 /unlock j3 the glove box, usethe master key.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a sud-den stop.

SIC2572Coupe

SIC2573


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

UPPER GLOVE BOX (Except forNavigation system equippedmodels)

WARNING

Keep upper glove box lid closed while driv-ing to help prevent injury in an accident ora sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, push the buttonon the front of lid jA .

WARNING

The center console box should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

SIC1848 SIC2575Automatic transmission model

SIC2676Manual transmission model


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe (manual transmissionmodel)

To remove the console lid:

1. Remove the original hinge mask. At-tach a cloth when using a screwdriver.

2. Loosen 3 screws, and remove the lid.

3. Install the replacement hinge maskand latch cover equipped with coupemanual transmission model.

REAR ARMREST POCKET

The pocket can store a first aid kit, etc.

CAUTION

Do not use for heavy articles.

SIC2677Coupe − Manual transmission model

SIC1850


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CARD HOLDER (Driver’s side)

WARNING

The card holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

COAT HOOK (Coupe)

To pull out the coat hook, push the hook jA

inside and release it.

CAUTION

Avoid hanging heavy goods on the hook.

STOWING GOLF BAGS (Coupe)

Normally, two standard golf bags can bestowed in the trunk. Insert the top of thegolf bag into left side of the trunk room j1then put the bag forward j2 . Insert the topof the 2nd golf bag into right side of thetrunk room j3 and pull it in all the way j4 .

Depending on their sizes, in some cases itmay not be possible to store two golf bags.

SIC2077A SIC2209


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before closingthe windows. Use the window lockswitch to prevent unexpected use ofthe power windows.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition key is in the ON position and forabout 45 seconds, after the ignitionswitch is turned to the OFF position. If thedriver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is can-celed.

Main power window switch(driver’s side)

1. Driver side window2. Front passenger side window3. Rear left passenger side window4. Rear right passenger side window5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push downjA or pull up jB the switch and hold it.The main switch (driver side switches) willopen or close all the windows.

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button jC is pushed in,only the driver side window can beopened or closed. Push it in again to can-cel.

SIC2576Sedan — Main switch

SIC2577Coupe — Main switch

WINDOWS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Passenger side power windowswitch

The passenger side switch will open orclose only the corresponding window. Toopen or close the window, hold the switchdown or up.

Automatic operation (For frontdoor windows or all doorwindows, if so equipped)

To fully open or close the window, com-pletely press or lift the switch and releaseit; it need not be held. The window willautomatically open or close all the way.To stop the window, just press or lift theswitch in the opposite direction.

Auto reverse function (Automaticoperation equipped model)

If the control unit detects something

caught in a window as it moves up, thewindow will be immediately lowered.The auto reverse function can be acti-vated when a window is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position, or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similarto something being caught in the windowoccurs.

SIC1892EFront passenger side

SIC2578Sedan — Type A

SIC2579Sedan — Type B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position which can-not be detected. Make sure that all passen-gers have their hands, etc., inside the ve-hicle before closing the window.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING FUNCTION(Coupe)

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed fromthe battery terminal, do not close either ofthe front doors. The automatic window ad-justing function will not work, and the sideroof panel may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic ad-justing function. When the door is beingopened, the window is automatically low-ered slightly to avoid contact between thewindow and the side roof panel. When thedoor is closed, the window is automati-cally raised slightly.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ig-nition key is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational forabout 45 seconds, even if the ignitionswitch is turned to the OFF position. If thedriver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the sunroof is can-celed.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open or close the sunroof, pressthe switch to the CLOSE j1 or OPEN j2

SIC1979BCoupe

SIC1854B

SUNROOF (if so equipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

side for less than 1 second and release it;it need not be held. The roof will auto-matically open or close all the way. Tostop the roof, press the switch once morewhile it is opening or closing.

To open or close the sunroof and stop onthe way, press the switch to the CLOSEj1 or OPEN j2 side for more than 1 sec-ond. The roof will stop when releasing theswitch.

Auto reverse function (Whenclosing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the sunroof as it moves to thefront, the sunroof will immediately openbackward.

The auto reverse function can be acti-vated when the sunroof is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similarto something being caught in the sunroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position which can-not be detected. Make sure that all passen-gers have their hands, etc., inside the ve-hicle before closing the sunroof.

Tilting the sunroof (Sedan)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, thenpress and hold the UP j1 side of theswitch. To tilt down the sunroof, pressand hold the DOWN j2 side.

Tilting the sunroof (Coupe)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, thenpress the UP j1 side of the switch and re-lease it; it need not be held. To tilt downthe sunroof, press the DOWN j2 side.

Sun shade

Open or close the sun shade by sliding itbackward or forward.

The shade will open automatically whenthe sunroof is opened. However, it mustbe closed manually.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an open sun-roof. Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex-tend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

O Do not place any heavy object on thesunroof or surrounding area.

If the sunroof does not close

If the sunroof does not close or open au-tomatically, use the following procedureto return sunroof operation to normal.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sedan:

1. Press the switch to the CLOSE/UP sidej1 to tilt up the sunroof. Release theswitch when the sunroof is in the fullytilted up position.

2. Press and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP j1 side for approximately10 seconds until the sunroof movesautomatically.Continue to press and hold the switchwhile the sunroof operates automati-cally. Do not release the switch.

3. Release the switch when the sunroofstops.

4. If the sunroof does not operate prop-erly after step 4, repeat the procedurestarting with step 1.

Coupe:

1. Press the switch to the CLOSE/UP j1side to tilt up the sunroof.

2. Release the switch when the sunroofis in the fully tilted up position.

3. Press and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP j1 side for approximately10 seconds until the sunroof auto-matically closes.


5. Press and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP j1 side for approximately 4seconds until the sunroof moves auto-matically.Continue to press and hold the switchwhile the sunroof operates automati-cally. Do not release the switch.


7. If the sunroof does not operate prop-erly after step 6, repeat the procedurestarting with step 1.

Have an INFINITI dealer check and repairthe sunroof.

ROOM LIGHT

The room light has a two-position switch.

When the switch is in the door positionj1 , the room light will illuminate when adoor is opened.

The light will stay on for about 30 sec-onds when:

O The doors are unlocked by the keyfob,a key or the power door lock switchwhile all doors are closed.

O The driver’s door is opened and then

SIC2580

INTERIOR LIGHTS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

closed while the key is removed fromthe ignition switch.

O The key is removed from the ignitionswitch while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the 30 secondtimer is activated, when:

O The driver’s door is locked either withthe keyfob, a key or the power doorlock switch.

O The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the “OFF” positionj2 , the room light does not illuminate, re-gardless of any condition.

MAP LIGHT

When the switch is pushed in, the lightwill turn on. When the switch is pushedagain, the light will turn off.

When the map light switch is in the ONposition, it will automatically turn off 30minutes after the ignition switch hasbeen turned to the OFF position. To turnon the light again, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

The map, personal, and vanity mirrorlights will automatically turn off 30 min-utes after the latest operation of the fol-

lowing with the ignition switch in the ACCor OFF position:

O Opening or closing any door

O Locking or unlocking with the keyfob,a key or the power door lock switch.

O Inserting or removing a key from theignition switch

These lights will turn on again when anyof the above operations is performed afterthe lights have turned off automatically.(The lights will turn off 30 minutes afterthe latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION

O Turn off the map, personal and vanitymirror lights when you leave the ve-hicle.

O Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

SIC2581


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

REAR PERSONAL LIGHT

jA : Left-hand sidejB : Right-hand side

The rear personal light has a three-position switch.

When the switch is in the door positionj2 , the light will illuminate when the reardoor is opened.

When the rear personal light switch is inthe “ON” position j1 , the rear personallights illuminate, regardless of any condi-tion.

When the switch is in the “OFF” j3 posi-tion, the rear personal lights do not illu-minate, regardless of any condition.

When the personal light switch is in theON position, it will automatically turn off30 minutes after the ignition switch hasbeen turned to the OFF position. To turnon the light again, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror isopened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, itwill automatically turn off 30 minutesafter the ignition switch has been turnedto the OFF position. To turn on the lightagain, turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

SIC2582 SIC1859

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, thelight will go off.

When the trunk light stays on, it will auto-matically turn off 30 minutes after the ig-nition switch has been turned to the OFFposition. To turn on the light again, turnthe ignition switch to the ON position.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency(RF) devices such as garage doors,gates, home and office lighting, entrydoor locks and security systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.No separate batteries are required. Ifthe vehicle’s battery is discharged oris disconnected, HomeLink will retainall programming.

Once the HomeLink Universal Trans-ceiver is programmed, retain the originaltransmitter for future programming proce-dures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes.For additional information, refer to “Pro-gramming HomeLink ” later in this sec-tion.

WARNING

O Do not use the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener models manu-factured after April 1, 1982.) A garagedoor opener which cannot detect an ob-ject in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

O During the programming procedure, yourgarage door or security gate will open orclose (if the transmitter is within range).Make sure that people or objects areclear of the garage door, gate, etc. thatyou are programming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink

TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (ifso equipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiverto operate a garage door, gate, or entrydoor opener, home or office lighting, youneed to be at the same location as thedevice. Note: Garage door openers (manu-factured after 1996) have “rolling codeprotection”. To program a garage dooropener equipped with “rolling code pro-tection”; you will need to use a ladder toget up to the garage door opener motor tobe able to access the “training” programbutton. 1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer

HomeLink buttons (to clear thememory) until the indicator light jA

blinks (after 20 seconds). Release bothbuttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-mitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) awayfrom the HomeLink surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneouslypress and hold both the HomeLinkbutton you want to program and thehand-held transmitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indi-cator light on the HomeLink flashes,changing from a “slow blink” to a“rapid blink”. When the indicator lightflashes rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapidly flashing light in-dicates successful programming. Toactivate the garage door or other pro-

SIC2247A SIC2248


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

grammed device, press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink button - re-leasing when the device begins to ac-tivate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkblinks rapidly for two seconds and thenturns solid, HomeLink has picked up a“rolling code” garage door opener sig-nal. You will need to proceed with thenext steps to train the HomeLink tocomplete the programming which mayrequire a ladder and another person forconvenience.

6. Press and release the training buttonlocated on the garage door opener’smotor to activate the “training mode”.This button is usually located near theantenna wire that hangs down fromthe motor. If the wire originates fromunder a light lens, you will need to re-move the lens to access the trainingbutton.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released thetraining button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,you have 30 seconds in which to performstep 7. Use the help of a second person

for convenience to assist when per-forming this step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressingand releasing the garage door openerprogram button, firmly press and re-lease the HomeLink button you’vejust programmed. Press and releasethe HomeLink button up to threetimes to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now beprogrammed.To program the remaining HomeLinkbuttons for additional door or gateopeners, follow steps 2-8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you wantto “clear” all previously programmedHomeLink buttons.

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLinkbuttons, refer to the HomeLink web siteat: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmit-

ting after 2 seconds. To program yourhand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-tinue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton (note steps 2 through 4 under“Programming HomeLink ”) while youpress and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until theindicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the “cycling” process to preventpossible damage to the garage dooropener components.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver(once programmed) may now be used toactivate the garage door, etc. To operate,simply press the appropriate programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver button.The red indicator light will illuminatewhile the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

the hand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter bat-teries with new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitterwith its battery area facing away fromthe HomeLink surface.

O press and hold both the HomeLinkand hand-held transmitter buttonswithout interruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away fromthe HomeLink surface. Hold thetransmitter in that position for up to15 seconds. If HomeLink is not pro-grammed within that time, try holdingthe transmitter in another position -keeping the indicator light in view atall times.

If you continue to have programming dif-ficulties, please contact the INFINITI Con-sumer Affairs Department. The phonenumbers are located in the Foreword ofthis Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared,however to clear all programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons and re-lease when the indicator light begins toflash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink UniversalTransceiver button, complete the fol-lowing.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins toflash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light begins toflash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pushingthe HomeLink button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you shouldchange the codes of any non-rolling codedevice that has been programmed intoHomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manualof each device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional in-formation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference thatmay be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the device.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys (except Intelligent Key) ............................ 3-2INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System (IVIS)Keys............................................................ 3-2

Doors ............................................................... 3-3Locking with key ......................................... 3-3Windows open/close with key..................... 3-3Locking with inside lock knob..................... 3-4Locking with power door lock switch .......... 3-4Child safety rear door lock (Sedan) ............. 3-5

Remote keyless entry system (models withoutIntelligent Key system)..................................... 3-5

How to use the remote keyless entrysystem ........................................................ 3-6

Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) ............ 3-9Door locks/unlocks precaution ................. 3-11Intelligent key operation........................... 3-11Opening and closing windows................... 3-13Operating the engine ................................ 3-14Intelligent key operating range ................ 3-16Warning signals ........................................ 3-17Trouble-shooting guide ............................. 3-19Operation with intelligent remote keylessentry system ............................................. 3-20Operation with the mechanical key andvalet key ................................................... 3-23

Hood .............................................................. 3-24Trunk lid......................................................... 3-25

Opener operation ...................................... 3-25Interior trunk lid release........................... 3-27Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-27

Fuel filler lid................................................... 3-28Opening the fuel filler lid .......................... 3-28Fuel filler cap ............................................ 3-29

Steering wheel ............................................... 3-30Manual operation...................................... 3-30Automatic operation (if so equipped) ........ 3-31

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-32Mirrors ........................................................... 3-32

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if soequipped) ................................................. 3-32Outside mirrors......................................... 3-33

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .... 3-34Automatic drive positioner operation ........ 3-34Entry/exit function .................................... 3-34Memory storage ........................................ 3-35System operation...................................... 3-36Cancel switch............................................ 3-36

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Master key 1 (With built-in tran-sponder chip), INFINITI MARK: silver

2. Master key 2 (With built-in tran-sponder chip), INFINITI MARK: silver

3. Valet key (With built-in transponderchip), INFINITI MARK: Black

4. Key number plate5. Wallet key6. Key case (Card type)

A key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep itin a safe place (such as your wallet), notin the vehicle. If you lose your keys, seean INFINITI dealer for duplicates by usingthe key number.

A key number is necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to dupli-cate from. If you still have a key, anINFINITI dealer can duplicate it.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (IVIS) KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using themaster or valet keys which are registeredto the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemcomponents in your vehicle. These keyshave a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all thelocks.

The valet key cannot be used for glovebox lock.

To protect belongings when you leave akey with someone, give them the valetkey only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY —Master and Valet keys:If you still have a key, the key number isnot necessary when you need extra In-finiti Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. AnINFINITI dealer can duplicate it. As manyas 5 IVIS keys can be used with one ve-hicle. You should bring all IVIS keys thatyou have to an INFINITI dealer for regis-tration. This is because the registrationprocess will erase the memory of all keycodes previously registered into the In-finiti Vehicle Immobilizer System. Afterthe registration process, these compo-nents will only recognize keys coded intothe Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System(IVIS) during registration. Any key that isnot given to your dealer at the time ofregistration will no longer be able to startyour vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,which contains an electrical transponder,to come into contact with salt water. Thiscould affect system function.

SPA1882

KEYS (except Intelligent Key)

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors, trunk lid and thefuel filler lid.

O Turning the door key cylinder to thefront of the vehicle j1 will lock alldoors, trunk lid and fuel filler lid.

O Turning the door key cylinder to therear of the vehicle j2 once will unlockthe driver’s door.Turning the door key cylinder to therear of the vehicle again within 5 sec-

onds will unlock all doors, the trunklid and the fuel filler lid.

WINDOWS OPEN/CLOSE WITH KEY

To open the door windows, turn the doorkey cylinder to the rear of the vehicle andhold the key for about 1 second.

To stop opening, return the door key cyl-inder to the neutral position by turningthe key.

To close the door windows, turn the doorkey cylinder to the front of the vehicleand hold the key for about 1 second.

To stop closing, return the door key cylin-der to the neutral position by turning thekey.

In the event of an obstruction, such as ahand, in the way of door windows, theauto reverse function will activate.

SPA1884

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOB

To individually lock the doors, push theinside lock knob down to the LOCK posi-tion j1 , then close the door.

When locking the door using inside lockknob, be sure not to leave the key insideof the vehicle.

To unlock, pull the inside lock knob up tothe UNLOCK position j2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

All doors will be locked when the powerdoor lock switch is pushed to the LOCKposition j1 with the driver’s or front pas-senger’s door open. Then close the doorand all doors will be locked.

When locking the door this way, be cer-tain not to leave the key inside the ve-hicle.

To unlock, push the power door lockswitch to the UNLOCK position j2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driveror front passenger) is moved to the LOCKposition with the key in the ignition andany door open, all doors will lock and un-lock automatically. This helps to preventthe keys from being accidentally lockedinside the vehicle.

SPA1814 SPA1505F


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(Sedan)

Child safety rear door lock helps preventrear doors from being opened acciden-tally, especially when small children arein the vehicle.

When the levers are in the LOCK j1 posi-tion, the rear doors can be opened by theoutside door handles only.

To disengage, move the levers to the un-lock position j2 .

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,trunk lid and fuel filler lid and activate thepanic alarm by using the keyfob from out-side the vehicle.Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.The keyfob can operate at a maximumdistance of approximately 33 ft (10 m)away from the vehicle. (The operating dis-tance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.)As many as 5 keyfobs can be used withone vehicle. For information about pur-chase and use of additional keyfobs, con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

O the battery is completely discharged,

O the distance between the vehicle andthe keyfob is more than 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate whenthe key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrencesmay damage the keyfob.

O Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

O Do not drop the keyfob.

O Do not strike the keyfob sharplyagainst another object.

O Do not place the keyfob for an ex-tended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITI rec-ommends erasing the ID code of thatkeyfob. This will prevent the keyfob fromunauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact an INFINITI dealer.

SPA0086A

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(models without Intelligent Key system)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Setting hazard indicator and hornmode

The factory setting of the remote keylessentry system is in hazard indicator andhorn mode.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button j1 is pushed, the hazardindicator flashes twice and the hornchirps once. When the UNLOCK button j2is pushed, the hazard indicator flashesonce.

If horn chirps are not necessary, the sys-tem can be switched to hazard indicatormode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indicatorflashes twice. When the UNLOCK button ispushed, neither the hazard indicator northe horn operates.

(Switching procedure)

Push the LOCK j1 and UNLOCK j2 but-tons on the keyfob simultaneously formore than 2 seconds to switch from onemode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator only mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-cator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

SPA1918


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Locking doors and fuel filler lid

1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2

2. Close all doors.*3

3. Push the LOCK button j1 on thekeyfob.

4. All doors, the trunk lid and the fuelfiller lid will lock.

All doors will lock when the LOCK buttonon the keyfob is pushed even though adoor remains open and/or the ignitionkey is in any position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

O When the LOCK button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard indicatorflashes twice and the horn chirps onceas a reminder that the doors are al-ready locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while akey is in the ignition switch. However,the panic alarm will not activate whenthe key is in the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while theignition switch is in the ON position.However, the switching indicators will

not function.*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any

door is open. However, the switchingindicators will not function.

Unlocking doors and fuel filler lid

1. Push the UNLOCK button j2 on thekeyfob once.

O The driver’s door and fuel filler lid un-lock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptin the ON position.

O The interior light timer activates andthe interior light comes on for 30 sec-onds when the interior light switch isat the DOOR position with the ignitionkey in any position except in the ONposition.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob again within 5 seconds.

O All doors and trunk lid unlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations is

SPA1260A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

performed within 1 minute of pressing theUNLOCK button.

O opening any door.

O opening trunk lid.

O turning the ignition switch to the ONposition

The interior light can be turned offwithout waiting for 30 seconds by turningthe ignition switch to the ON position orby locking the doors with the keyfob.

Opening the windows

Push the UNLOCK button j2 on thekeyfob.

The driver’s door and fuel filler lid will un-lock.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button formore than 3 seconds. The door windowswill start to lower.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button un-til windows are fully open.

To stop the windows lowering operation,release the UNLOCK button.

To start the windows lowering operation,press the UNLOCK button again for morethan 3 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button j3 on the key-fob for longer than 0.5 seconds whenthe ignition switch is in any positionexcept the ON position.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-ing the keyfob when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button j4 on the key-fob for longer than 0.5 seconds withthe key removed from the ignitionswitch.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O The LOCK or the UNLOCK button onkeyfob is pressed, or

O The PANIC or the TRUNK button ispushed on keyfob.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig-nals to communicate with the vehicle.When the Intelligent Key is near the ve-hicle, such as in your pocket or purse, itallows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,or started without inserting the ignitionkey. It is also possible to use the remotecontrol entry function.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you.

O Do not leave the vehicle with the Intel-ligent Key inside.

O The Intelligent Key may not functioncorrectly depending on the environ-ment or operating conditions. It couldalso malfunction if you do not use itcorrectly.

O The Intelligent Key transmits faint ra-dio waves.

In the following situations, the Intel-ligent Key and remote control entryfunctions may not operate correctly,and you may have to use the metal

key (mechanical key, valet key or wal-let key):

• when there are strong signalscoming from a television tower,power station or broadcasting sta-tion.

• when you have wireless equipmentor a cellular phone with you.

• when the Intelligent Key is in con-tact with or covered by a metallicmaterial.

• when radio wave-type remote con-trol entry is used nearby.

• when the Intelligent Key is placednear an electric appliance such as apersonal computer.

O The Intelligent Key continually con-sumes battery power as the key re-ceives a signal to communicate withthe vehicle. Battery life is about 2years, although it varies dependingon the operating conditions. When thebattery of the Intelligent Key is low,the green blinking key warning lightgoes out about 30 seconds after theignition knob is turned to ON. If thebattery runs down, replace it with anew one.

O If the Intelligent Key receives strongsignal over an extended period oftime, the battery could quickly rundown. Do not place the IntelligentKey near an electric appliance such asa television set or personal computer.

O Because the ignition knob is elec-tronically controlled, if the battery iscompletely discharged when the igni-tion knob is in the LOCK position, thesteering lock cannot be released andthe ignition knob cannot be turned(including the mechanical key). Becareful not to completely dischargethe battery.

O In case the battery is completely dis-charged, make sure to recharge thebattery immediately.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if soequipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets3. Valet key (metal key)* 1 set4. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key) 1 set5. Key number plate 1 set

*: Refer to “INFINITI vehicle immobilizersystem (IVIS) keys” earlier in this sec-tion.

WARNING

O The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves that can adversely affect medicalelectric equipment.

O If you have a pacemaker, you shouldcontact the medical equipment manu-facturer to ask if it will be affected bythe Intelligent Key signal.

The valet key cannot be used for the glovebox lock.

To protect belongings when you leave akey with someone, give them the valetkey only.

Record the key number on the keynumber plate/metal tag and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), NOT INTHE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup-plied with your key. Keep the plate in asafe place. INFINITI does not record keynumbers so it is very important to keeptrack of your key number plate.

As many as 4 Intelligent Key can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional re-mote controllers, contact an INFINITIdealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Keyfunctions can become cancelled. Pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when driving. The Intelligent Key is aprecision device with a built-in transmitter.To avoid damaging it, please note the fol-lowing.

O The Intelligent Key is water resistant,wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completelydry.

O Do not bend, drop or strike it againstanother object.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in a place where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

SPA1886


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

O Do not use a magnet key holder.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key nearan electric appliance such as a televi-sion set or personal computer.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key in astorage area (for example, a doorpocket or glove box). It could be dam-aged or activated unexpectedly.

O Do not allow the Intelligent Key tocome into contact with water or saltwater, and do not wash it in a washingmachine. This could affect the systemfunction.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,INFINITI recommends erasing the ID codeof that Intelligent Key. This will preventthe Intelligent Key from unauthorized useto unlock the vehicle. For information re-garding the erasing procedure, please con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

O After locking with the door handle re-quest switch, make sure the doors aresecurely locked.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key frombeing left inside the vehicle, makesure you carry the key with you andthen lock the doors.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key frombeing left inside the trunk, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenclose the trunk.

O You can lock or unlock the doors usingonly the door handle, which detectsthe Intelligent Key.

O When you try to unlock the door whilepulling the door handle, the door maynot unlock. In this case, release thedoor handle and the door will unlock.Pull the door handle again and thedoor will open.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the key out from your pocket orpurse.

SPA1887


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

When you carry the Intelligent Key withyou, you can lock or unlock all doors bypushing the door handle request switchjA within the range of operation.

Locking doors and fuel filler lid

1. Turn the ignition knob to the LOCK po-sition and remove the ignition key ifany metal key is in the ignitionknob.*1, *2

2. Close all the doors.*3

3. Push any door handle request switchwhile carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.*4

4. All the doors and fuel filler lid willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andoutside buzzer sounds twice.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile a mechanical key or valet key isin the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the ignition knob is not in theLOCK position.

*3: Doors do not lock by pushing thedoor handle request switch or theLOCK button on the Intelligent Keywhile any door is open. Outsidebuzzer sounds to warn you. However,doors lock with the metal key even ifany door is open.

*4: Doors do not lock with door handlerequest switch with the IntelligentKey inside the vehicle and outsidebuzzer sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle, doors can belocked with another Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel filler lid

1. Push the door handle request switchonce.

Driver’s side:

O The driver door and fuel filler lid un-lock.

Front passenger side:

O Only corresponding door unlocks.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside buzzer sounds once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptthe ON position.

3. Push the door handle request switchagain within 5 seconds.

O All doors and the fuel filler lid unlock.

O The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside buzzer sounds once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automaticallyafter pressing the door handle requestswitch unless one of the following opera-tions is performed within 1 minute.

O any door is opened

O the ignition knob is pushed

O the mechanical key or the valet key isinserted into the ignition knob

The interior light, ceiling light (if so

SPA1888


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

equipped) and step light can be turned offwithout waiting for 30 seconds by turningthe ignition switch to the ON position orby locking the doors.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switchjA .

2. The trunk will be unlatched and buzzersounds four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the trunk, lockoutprotection is equipped with the Intelli-gent Key system.When the trunk lid is closed with the In-telligent Key inside the trunk, the outsidebuzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

OPENING AND CLOSINGWINDOWS

O To open the windows, push the UN-LOCK button on the Intelligent Key forabout 3 seconds or turn the door keycylinder with the metal key to the rearof the vehicle for about 2 secondsafter the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCKbutton or turn the key to the neutralposition.

O To close the windows, turn the door

SPA1889

SPA1890


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

key cylinder to the front of the vehiclefor about 2 seconds after the door islocked.

To stop closing, turn the key to theneutral position.

The door windows will open or closewhile turning the metal key. See “Doors”earlier in this section.

OPERATING THE ENGINE

Ignition knob positions

Push in the ignition knob in the jB rangewhen you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) jA :

The ignition knob can only be locked inthe jA position.

The ignition knob will be unlocked whenit is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-sition jD while carrying the IntelligentKey.

ACC (Accessories) jD :

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position) jE :

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

START jF :

This position starts the engine. As soonas the engine has started, release theknob immediately. It will automatically re-turn to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-nition knob” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section.

The ignition knob cannot be turned backto the LOCK position unless the shift leveris in P position. (It can be turned to onlyjC .)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionknob in ACC or ON positions when the en-gine is not running for an extended period.

SPA1628


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

This can discharge the battery.

Starting the engine

When driving the vehicle, be sure to carrythe Intelligent Key with you.

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Slowly push the ignition knob in.When the Intelligent Key warning lightjA in the instrument panel comes onin green, the ignition knob can beturned.

3. Turn the ignition knob to START andthe engine will be started.

4. When the engine starts, release the ig-nition knob.

WARNING

Do not start the engine from outside thevehicle through the window. Doing socould lead to an accident and injury. Besure to sit in the driver’s seat to use thekey.

For important safety information, see“Starting the engine” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

O When the ignition knob is pushedunder the following conditions, thekey warning light in the instrumentpanel comes on in red. It is not pos-sible to turn the ignition knob when:

• you do not have the Intelligent Keywith you

• the Intelligent Key battery has rundown

• you have a Intelligent Key for an-other vehicle with you

O Slowly turn the ignition knob after thekey warning light comes on in green.

SPA1891


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If it is turned quickly, it may stick andbe difficult to turn.

O The engine may not start if the Intelli-gent Key is placed:

• inside the glove box or the doorpocket

• on the instrument panel

• in the corner of interior compart-ment.

O If it is difficult to turn the ignitionknob, perform the following:

• Push the ignition knob and turn it tothe left and then to the right.

• Turn the ignition knob while gentlyturning the steering wheel to the leftor right.

Stopping the engine

1. Shift the selector lever to the P posi-tion.

2. Turn the ignition knob to ACC.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, be sure to ob-serve the following:

O Shift the selector lever to P. (In otherpositions, the ignition knob will not re-turn to LOCK.)

O Securely return the ignition knob toLOCK.

O Set the parking brake. Failure to do socould result in unexpected vehiclemovement and could lead to severe in-jury.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATINGRANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can be usedonly when you carry the key with you andoperate as specified in the operatingrange inside or outside the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery runsdown or where there are strong radiowaves or noise, the operating range maybe narrower or the key may be inopera-tive.

Operating range of the door ortrunk lock/unlock function

The outside sensors are in the front out-side door handles and the trunk.

The operating range of the door or trunk

SPA1900


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

lock/unlock function by pushing the doorhandle request switch or trunk open re-quest switch is shown in the illustration.

j1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handlerequest switch

j2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk openrequest switch

O If you are too close to the outsidedoor handles or rear bumper, the In-telligent Key may not operate.

O If the Intelligent Key is in the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyonewho does not carry the Intelligent Keyto lock/unlock the doors by pushingthe door handle request switch. Operating range for engine start

function

The operating range for starting the en-gine is inside the vehicle.

O If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-ment panel, rear parcel shelf, insidethe glove box or door pocket, or thecorner of interior compartment, it maynot be possible to start the engine.

O If the Intelligent Key is near the dooror door glass outside the vehicle, itmay be possible to start the engine.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, chime or beepsounds inside and outside the vehicleand a warning light comes on in the in-strument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or thewarning light comes on, be sure to checkthe vehicle and Intelligent Key.

Alarm and warning when lockingthe doors

When the front door warning chime oroutside buzzer sounds, check for the fol-lowing:

O The ignition knob is turned to LOCK.

O The Intelligent Key is not left insidethe vehicle.

O Doors are closed securely.

O The selector lever is in the P position.

SPA1901


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Alarm and warning when theengine stops

When the P position selecting warninglight jB in the instrument panel blinks inred:

O Make sure the selector lever is in theP position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

O Make sure the selector lever is in theP position and the ignition knob isturned to LOCK.

If the chime sounds continuously when

the driver’s door is opened, check the fol-lowing:

O The selector lever is in the P positionand the ignition knob is turned toLOCK.

O The mechanical key or the valet key isnot inserted into the ignition knob.

O The inside warning chime may stopwhen one of the following is per-formed.

• Returning the ignition knob to LOCK.

• Removing the mechanical key or thevalet key.

• Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when theengine starts

When the key warning light jA is blinkingin red and the outside buzzer sounds,make sure the Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle.

Warning for low battery power

O This warning is to let you know thatthe battery of the Intelligent Key willrun down soon. Replace it with a newone.

• The green blinking key warning lightjA goes out about 30 seconds afterthe ignition knob is turned to ON.

O We recommend replacing the batteryat an INFINITI dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Keyfrom being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power doorlock switch with the Intelligent Key in thevehicle, all of the doors unlock immedi-ately and the beep sounds to warn youwhen the door is closed.

SPA1892


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDESymptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handle re-quest switch

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked.

Take out the Intelligent Key from thevehicle and push the door handle re-quest switch.Turn the ignition knob to LOCK andpush the door handle request switchwhile carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.Close all the doors securely and pushthe door handle request switch whilecarrying the Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the doors

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds.

The ignition knob is not turned to theLOCK position.

Turn the ignition knob to the LOCK posi-tion.

The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in red and the outsidebuzzer sounds 3 times.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou.

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key has been left in thevehicle.

Take out the Intelligent Key from thevehicle and close the door.

When closing the trunk The outside buzzer sounds and thetrunk opens.

The Intelligent Key has been left in thetrunk room.

Take out the Intelligent Key from thetrunk room and close the trunk.

When opening the driver’s door An inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition knob is not in the LOCKposition, or the mechanical key or valetkey is inserted into the ignition knob.

Turn the ignition knob to the LOCK posi-tion.Remove the mechanical key or valet keyfrom the ignition knob.

When stopping the engine The P position warning light in the in-strument panel blinks in red.

The selector lever is not in the P posi-tion.

Make sure that the selector lever is inthe P position.

When turning the ignition knob An inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition knob is not turned to theLOCK position.

Turn the ignition knob to the LOCK posi-tion.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See

“BATTERY REPLACEMENT” on page 8-27.

When pushing the ignition knob The key warning light in the instrumentpanel comes on in red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

If the key warning light comes on in redeven while you are carrying the Intelli-gent Key, the battery is completely dis-charged. Replace the battery with a newone. See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” onpage 8-27.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting examples

When it is difficult to turn the ignitionknob

O Push the ignition knob and turn it tothe left and then to the right.

O While gently turning the steeringwheel to the left or right, turn the igni-tion knob.

OPERATION WITH INTELLIGENTREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,fuel filler lid, activate the panic alarm andopen the windows by pushing the buttonson the Intelligent Key from outside thevehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-gent Key can operate at a distance of ap-proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.(The effective distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle.)As many as 4 Intelligent Key can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional In-telligent Key, contact an INFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-ligent Key will not operate when:

O the Intelligent Key is too far awayfrom the vehicle

O the Intelligent Key battery runs down

After locking with the Intelligent remotekeyless entry function, pull the doorhandle to make sure the doors are se-curely locked.

The operating range varies depending onthe environment. To securely operate thelock and unlock buttons, approach the ve-hicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

The panic alarm will not activate whenthe mechanical key or the valet key is inthe ignition knob.

How to use remote keyless entrysystem

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode:

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator andhorn mode when you first receive the ve-hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button j1 is pushed, the hazardindicator flashes twice and the hornchirps once. When the UNLOCK button j2is pushed, the hazard indicator flashesonce.

SPA1895


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If horn are not necessary, the system canbe switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indicatorflashes twice. When the UNLOCK button ispushed, neither the hazard indicator northe horn operates.

(Switching procedure)

Push the LOCK j1 and UNLOCK j2 but-tons on the Intelligent Key simulta-neously for more than 2 seconds toswitch from one mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard

indicator only mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-cator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

Locking doors and fuel filler lid:

1. Remove the mechanical key or the va-let key if any key is in the ignitionknob.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the LOCK button j1 on the Intel-ligent Key.

4. All doors and fuel filler lid will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCKbutton on the Intelligent Key is pushedeven though the ignition knob is in theON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe horn chirps once.

O When the LOCK button j1 is pushedwith all doors locked, the hazard indi-cator flashes twice and the hornchirps once as a reminder that the

SPA1923


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the mechanical key or the valetkey is in the ignition knob or the igni-tion knob is pushed in.

*2: Doors do not lock with the IntelligentKey while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel filler lid:

1. Push the UNLOCK button j2 on the In-telligent Key once.

O The driver’s door and fuel filler lid un-lock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition knob in any position exceptthe ON position.

O The interior light turns on and thelight timer activates for 30 secondswhen the switch is in the DOOR posi-tion with the ignition knob in any posi-tion except the ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-ligent Key again within 5 seconds.

O All doors unlock.

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations isperformed within 1 minute of pressing theUNLOCK button.

O opening any door

O the ignition knob is pushed

O the mechanical key or the valet key isinserted into the ignition knob

The interior light can be turned offwithout waiting for 30 seconds by turningthe ignition switch to the ON position orby locking the doors with the IntelligentKey.

Opening the windows:

See “Opening and closing windows” onthe previous page.

Releasing the trunk lid:

1. Push the TRUNK button j3 on the In-telligent Key for longer than 0.5 sec-onds when the ignition switch is inany position except the ON position.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-ing the Intelligent Key when the ignitionknob is in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm:

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button j4 on the In-telligent Key for longer than 0.5 sec-onds with the metal key removed from


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

the ignition knob or the ignition knobnot pushed in.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O Any one of the buttons on the Intelli-gent Key is pushed.

OPERATION WITH THEMECHANICAL KEY AND VALET KEY

If the Intelligent Key cannot be used be-cause its battery is discharged, use themetal key to lock or unlock the doors anduse the mechanical key or the valet key,which is registered to the INFINITI Ve-hicle Immobilizer System components, tostart the engine.

Removing the mechanical key

O Release the lock knob at the back ofthe intelligent key and remove the me-chanical key.

O To install the mechanical key to the in-telligent key, securely lock the lockknob and then check that the me-chanical key will not move.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withthe mechanical key installed in it.

Locking/unlocking the doors withthe metal key (mechanical key,valet key and wallet key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by in-serting the metal key into the key cylinderin the driver’s door in the same way asthe ordinary key.

Starting the engine with themechanical key

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Insert the mechanical key or the valetkey into the ignition knob.

SPA1878


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Turn the ignition knob to START andstart the engine.

4. After starting the engine, release theknob.

When the engine is off, the steering wheellock cannot be unlocked.

For important safety information, see the“5. Starting and driving” section.

Windows open/close with themechanical key

See “Opening and closing windows” onthe previous page.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle j1located below the instrument panel;the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Raise the lever j2 at the front of thehood with your fingertips and raisethe hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot j3in the front edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the as-sist bar to its original position, thenslowly close the hood and make sureit locks into place.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

O If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid in-jury do not open the hood.

SPA1632 SPA1423

HOOD


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not drive with the trunk lid open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle. See“Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for exhaust gas.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with therear seatback and trunk lid securelylatched when not in use, and preventchildren’s access to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release switch is located atthe bottom of the instrument panel.

To open, slide the trunk lid release switchlocated at the bottom of the instrumentpanel or press the TRUNK button of thekeyfob.

To close, push the trunk lid down se-curely.

Trunk open request switch

Models without Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushingthe trunk open request switch jA whenthe front passenger inside lock knob is inthe unlock position.

Models with Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushingthe trunk open request switch when theIntelligent Key is within the operatingrange of the trunk lock/unlock functionregardless of the inside lock knob posi-

SPA1896 SPA1890

TRUNK LID


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

tion. See “Intelligent Key system” earlierin the section.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside theglove box is OFF,

O the trunk lid cannot be opened withthe trunk lid release switch.

O the trunk lid cannot be opened bypushing the trunk open requestswitch.

O for models equipped with the Intelli-gent Key system, the trunk lockoutprotection function is not activated.

When the cancel switch located inside theglove box is OFF, the trunk lid can be

opened with the TRUNK button of the key-fob or Intelligent Key.

SPA1897


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

The interior trunk lid release mechanismprovides a means of escape in the eventof becoming locked inside the trunk.

The handle j1 is located on the back sideof the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-ment.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pullthe release handle towards you until thelock releases and push up on the trunklid. The release lever is made of a mate-rial that glows in the dark after a briefexposure to ambient light.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mecha-nism allows opening of the trunk lid inthe event of the loss of electrical powersuch as a discharged battery.

The handle j1 is located on the back sideof the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-ment.

Sedan

Access the handle through the interiortrunk access hole (rear seat armrest).

SPA1591BSedan

SPA1561ACoupe

SPA1590ASedan


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards front ofvehicle until the lock releases.

Return the handle to the original positionby securing the latch. Otherwise, it maycause water to leak into the trunk.

Coupe

Access the handle from the rear seat.

Fold down the rear seatback by pullingthe strap j1 , located at center bottom ofthe seatback sideways.

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,

pull the release handle towards front ofvehicle until the lock releases.

OPENING THE FUEL FILLER LID

To open the fuel filler lid, unlock the fuelfiller lid lock by using one of the followingoperations, then push the right-hand sideof the lid (Sedan), the left-hand side ofthe lid (Coupe).

O Press the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob or Intelligent Key once.

O Insert the key into the door lock cylin-der and turn the door key cylinder tothe rear of the vehicle.

O Press the power door lock switch tothe UNLOCK position.

SPA1698ACoupe

SPA1427CSedan

FUEL FILLER LID


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

To lock, close the fuel filler lid and lockthe doors.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type.Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchetingclicks are heard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder jA

while refueling.

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury.

O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off au-tomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

SPA1562ACoupe

SPA1428BSedan

SPA1563ACoupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

spray and possibly a fire.

O Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. An incorrect cap couldalso cause the malfunction indi-cator lamp to illuminate.

O Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of serious in-jury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.— Do not use electronic devices when

filling.— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-ing it.

— Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

O Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler capproperly may cause the malfunc-tion indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.If the lamp illuminates becausethe fuel filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continueto drive the vehicle. The lampshould turn off after a few driving trips.If the lamp does not turn off aftera few driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by an INFINITI dealer.

O For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” inthe “2. Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

MANUAL OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever j1 down and adjustthe steering wheel up or down j2 to thedesired position.

SPA1946

STEERING WHEEL


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push the lock lever up securely to lockthe steering wheel in place.

Telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever j3 down and adjustthe steering wheel forward or backwardj4 to the desired position.Push the lock lever up securely to lockthe steering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if soequipped)

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steeringwheel up or down, forward or rearward tothe desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation:

The automatic drive positioner system willmake the steering wheel move upautomatically when the key is removedfrom the ignition switch. This lets thedriver get into and out of the seat moreeasily. The steering wheel moves backinto position when the key is inserted intothe ignition switch. For more information,see “Automatic drive positioner” later inthis section.

SPA1898


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not store the main sun visor beforestoring the extension sun visor.

O Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front,swing down the main sun visor j1 .

2. To block glare from the side, removethe main sun visor from the centermount and swing it to the side j2 .

3. Draw out the extension sun visor j3from the main sun visor j4 to blockfrom farther glare.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection ac-cording to the intensity of the headlightof the following vehicle.

When the inside mirror AUTO switch jA ispushed, the indicator light jB will illumi-nate and excessive glare from the head-lights of the vehicle behind you will be re-duced. When the switch of the inside mir-ror OFF switch jC is pushed, the insidemirror will operate normally.SPA1592E

SPA1709B

SUN VISORS MIRRORS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, seethe description in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on thepassenger side are closer than they ap-pear. Be careful when moving to the right.Using only this mirror could cause an acci-dent. Use the inside mirror or glance overyour shoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

The outside mirror adjustment will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is inthe ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob right or left to se-lect the right or left outside mirror, thenadjust by tilting the control knob.

SPA1390


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-ward the rear of the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONEROPERATION

The automatic drive positioner systemhas two features:

O Entry/exit function (only available onmodels equipped with automatictransmission)

O Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driv-er’s seat and steering column will auto-matically move when the automatic trans-mission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get intoand out of the driver’s seat more easily.(This feature is not available on modelsequipped with manual transmission.)

The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering wheel will move up when thedriver’s door is opened with the key or ig-nition knob in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous positions:

O When the key is inserted into the igni-tion switch after closing the driver’sdoor, or when the driver’s door is

closed after inserting the key into theignition switch.

O When the ignition knob is pushed withthe driver’s door closed.

O When the key or ignition knob isturned to the ON position.

The entry/exit function can be activatedor cancelled by pressing and holding theSET switch for more than 10 secondswhile the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. The indicator light will blinkonce when the function is cancelled, andthe indicator light will blink twice whenthe function is activated. If the batterycable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be can-celled. In such a case, after connectingthe battery or replacing with a new fuse,open and close the driver’s door morethan two times with the ignition switch orignition knob in the LOCK position to acti-vate the entry/exit function.

MPA0008

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if soequipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat andsteering column can be stored in the au-tomatic drive positioner memory. Followthese procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatictransmission, set the selector lever tothe P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manualtransmission, place the shift lever inthe N (Neutral) position and set theparking brake.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and steeringcolumn to the desired positions bymanually operating each adjustingswitch. For additional information, see“Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraintsystem” section and “Steering wheel”earlier in this section.

3. Turn the ignition ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds afterpushing the switch. After the indicatorlight goes off, the selected positionsare stored in the selected memory (1or 2).

If memory is stored in the samememory switch, the previous memorywill be deleted.

Linking a keyfob or Intelligent Keyto a stored memory position

A keyfob or Intelligent Key can be linkedto a stored memory position with the fol-lowing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memoryposition.

2. While the indicator light for thememory switch being set is illumi-nated for 5 seconds, press the

button on the keyfob or Intelli-gent Key. The indicator light will blink.After the indicator light goes off, thekeyfob or Intelligent Key is linked tothat memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignitionswitch, press the button on the key-fob or Intelligent Key. The driver’s seatand steering wheel will move to thememorized position.

Confirming memory storage

O Turn the ignition ON and push the SETswitch. If the main memory has notbeen stored, the indicator light willcome on for approximately 0.5 sec-onds. When the memory has stored inposition, the indicator light will stayon for approximately 5 seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, orif the fuse opens, the memory will becanceled.

Reset the desired position using theprevious procedure.

SPA1899


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the memorized position

1. For vehicles equipped with automatictransmission, set the selector lever tothe P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manualtransmission, place the shift lever inthe N (Neutral) position and set theparking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat and steering columnwill move to the memorized positionwith the indicator light flashing, andthen the light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system willnot work or will stop operating under thefollowing conditions:

O when the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O when the adjusting switch for the driv-er’s seat and steering column isturned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O when the cancel switch is pushed tocancel (However, it will not be can-celled if the switch is pushed whilethe seat and steering column are re-turning to the previous positions(entry/exit function).).

O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed for at least 1 second.

O when the seat has already beenmoved to the memorized position.

O when no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

O when the parking brake is not applied.— M/T models

O when the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h) while the parking brakeis applied. — M/T modelsTo restart the drive positioner system,move the parking brake to off and on.

O when the engine is started while mov-ing the automatic drive positioner.

O when the AT selector lever is movedfrom the P position to any other posi-tion (However, it will not be cancelledif the switch is pushed while the seatand steering column are returning to

the previous positions (entry/exitfunction).).

CANCEL SWITCH

When the CANCEL side of the switch ispushed, the automatic drive positionersystem will not function.

When the AUTO side of the switch ispushed, the system will function.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems

Safety note....................................................... 4-2Control panel buttons — with navigation system(if so equipped)................................................ 4-2

Names of the components .......................... 4-3How to use joystick and “ENTER” button..... 4-3How to use “PREVIOUS” button .................. 4-3Setting up the start-up screen .................... 4-3How to use the “INFO” button .................... 4-3How to use the “SETTING” button............... 4-6How to use the button ...................... 4-10

Ventilators...................................................... 4-10Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ........... 4-11

Automatic operation.................................. 4-12Manual operation...................................... 4-13Dual zone button (if so equipped)............. 4-13Ambient temperature ................................ 4-13

Operating tips........................................... 4-13In-cabin microfilter ................................... 4-14

Servicing air conditioner................................. 4-14Audio system ................................................. 4-15

FM radio reception .................................... 4-15AM radio reception ................................... 4-16Satellite radio reception............................ 4-16Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-16FM-AM-satellite radio with compact disc(CD) changer ............................................. 4-22CD care and cleaning ................................ 4-27Steering switch for audio control(if so equipped) ........................................ 4-27Antenna .................................................... 4-28

Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-29

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving, in or-der that full attention may be given todriving operation.

O Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in acci-dents, fire, or electric shock.

O Do not use this system if you noticeany abnormality, such as a frozenscreen or lack of sound. Continued useof the system may result in accident,fire or electric shock.

O In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact an INFINITI dealer. Ig-noring such conditions may lead to ac-cidents, fire, or electric shock.

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the enginenot running (ignition ON or ACC) for along time, it will use up all the batterypower, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on thecontrol panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key onthe screen. By selecting this key you can

SAA0939

SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

proceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1., 2., 5., 6., 9., 10. and 11.

For Navigation control buttons: refer tothe separate Navigation Owner’s Manual.

3. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

4. INFO button (P. 4-3)

7. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)

8. brightness control button(P. 4-10)

12. PREVIOUS button (P. 4-3)

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button foroperation.

HOW TO USE “PREVIOUS”BUTTON

This button has two functions.

O Go back to the previous display.

When this button is pressed during setup,setup will be canceled, and the screenwill return to the previous screen.

O Finish setup.

When this button is pressed after setup iscompleted, the settings will be renewedas directed, and the screen will return tothe map.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREEN

When you turn the ignition switch to theACC or ON position, the SYSTEMSTART-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the“IAGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français)key then push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button,the Navigation system will not proceed tothe next step display.

To proceed to the next step, refer to theseparate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

HOW TO USE THE “INFO” BUTTON

The VEHICLE INFORMATION screen willappear when the “INFO” button ispushed.

Choose an item using the joystick andpush the “ENTER” button.

After viewing or adjusting the informationon the following screens, push the “PRE-VIOUS” button to return to the VEHICLEINFORMATION menu.

SAA0940

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Trip computer information

Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Av-erage Speed will be displayed.

To reset each item, select the “Reset” keyusing the joystick and push the “ENTER”button immediately before driving the ve-hicle.

Fuel economy information

Average fuel economy and distance toempty will be displayed for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, selectthe “Reset” key using the joystick andpush the “ENTER” button.

If the “Fuel Economy Record” key is high-lighted with the joystick and the “ENTER”button is pushed, the average fuel con-sumption history will be displayed ingraph form along with the average for theprevious Reset-to-Reset period.

SAA0638 SAA0582A SAA0855


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Maintenance information

You can set the engine oil and the oilfilter interval.

To display the setting of the maintenanceinterval, select the “Engine Oil” or “OilFilter” key using the joystick and pushthe “ENTER” button.

To set the maintenance interval, selectthe “Maintenance Schedule” key by usingthe joystick and move the joystick to rightor left.

To reset the maintenance interval, selectthe “Reset” key using the joystick andpush the “ENTER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMA-TION automatically when set trip distanceis reached, select the “Display Mainte-nance Notification” key and push the “EN-TER” button.

SAA0941 SAA0942 SAA0943


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Maintenance notification

The “MAINTENANCE NOTIFICATION”screen (“ENGINE OIL” or “OIL FILTER”)will be automatically displayed as shownwhen both of the following conditions aremet:

O the vehicle is driven the set distanceand the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

O the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition the next time the vehicle willbe driven.

To return to the previous display after the

“MAINTENANCE NOTIFICATION” screen isdisplayed, push the “PREVIOUS” button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTIFICATION”screen displays each time the key isturned ON until one of the following con-ditions are met:

O “Reset” is selected.

O “Display Maintenance Notification” isset OFF.

O the maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTON

The SETTINGS screens will appear whenthe “SETTING” button is pushed.

SAA0968 SAA0944


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Clock setting

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key andmove the joystick to the right or left toadjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the“PREVIOUS” button.

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to ad-just the clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

SAA0947 SAA0948 SAA0949


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones de-pending on the current location.

O Pacific zone

O Mountain zone

O Central zone

O Eastern zone

O Atlantic zone

O Newfoundland zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS]screen will appear.

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding

to the selected zone will be displayed. Pa-cific zone has been set as the initial (de-fault) setting.

SAA0950 SAA0663


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Display settings

The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appearafter pushing the “SETTING” button, se-lecting “Display” key and pushing the“ENTER” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:

To adjust the brightness and contrast ofthe screen, select the“Brightness/contrast” key and push the“ENTER” button. You can then use the joy-stick to adjust the brightness to Darker orBrighter and the contrast to Lower orHigher. For information on Map Back-

ground, please refer to the separate Navi-gation System Owner’s Manual.

Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SET-TING” button and select the “Display”key and “Display Off” key. The indicatorof the “Display Off” will turn to amber.When any mode button is pushed withthe screen off, the screen turns on for fur-ther operation. The screen will turn off au-tomatically 5 seconds after the operationis finished on the map display.

Display Duration Setting:

To set the display duration, select the“Display Duration Setting” key by usingthe joystick and move the joystick to rightor left.

To turn on the screen, push the “SET-TING” button and select the “Display”key and “Display Off” key, then set thescreen to on by pushing the “ENTER” but-ton.

Language/Unit settings

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appearwhen selecting the “Language/Unit” keyand pushing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, MPGMetric o km, L/100 km

You can select the language and unitusing the joystick and “ENTER” button.

SAA0935 SAA0946


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button againwill change the display to DAY or NIGHTdisplay. Then, adjust the brightness mov-ing the joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 sec-onds, or if the “PREVIOUS” button ispushed, the display will return to the pre-vious display.

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow di-rection of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are closed when the vent le-ver is moved left (front) or down(rear).

: This symbol indicates that thevents are open when the ventlever is moved right (front) or up(rear).

SAA0563AFront

SAA0564BRear (if so equipped)

VENTILATORS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. DEF button2. Rear window defroster button (Refer to

the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-tion.)

3. Fresh air button4. Air recirculation button5. AUTO/ECON button

6. Temperature control dial7. DUAL zone button (if so equipped)8. OFF button9. A/C button10. Manual air flow control button11. Manual fan control button

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

O On hot, sunny days, temperatures in aclosed vehicle could quickly becomehigh enough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals. Do notleave children or adults who would nor-mally require the assistance of others inyour vehicle. Unattended pets shouldalso not be left alone.

O Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

O Positioning of the heater and/or air con-ditioner controls should not be donewhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controlsto activate the air conditioner.

SAA0936

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(Automatic)


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidifiedheating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically works tokeep a constant temperature. Air flow dis-tribution and fan speed are also controlledautomatically.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button on. (AUTOwill be displayed.)

2. If the A/C button indicator is off, pushthe A/C button to activate air condi-tioner. The A/C button indicator willcome on.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to setthe desired temperature.

O Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

Economical operation (ECON)Economical operation reduces some loadto the engine to improve the fuel economy.

It allows higher humidity than normal op-eration.

Pushing the AUTO/ECON button changesoperations as follows while the A/C buttonindicator is on. AUTO → ECON → AUTO

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the AUTO button. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the airconditioner. The A/C button indicatorwill turn off.


O The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

O Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwisethe system may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging

1. Push the DEF button on. (The indi-cator light on the button will come on.)


O To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, push the manual fancontrol button + and set to themaximum position.

O As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, push the AUTO buttonto return to the auto mode.

O When the DEF button is pushed,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperaturesabove 23°F (−5°C) to defog the wind-shield, and the air recirculate mode willautomatically be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment to improve the defoggingperformance.


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan control button − or + tomanually control the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Fresh air

Push the fresh air button to drawoutside air into the passenger compart-ment. The indicator light on the buttonwill come on.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle.The indicator light on the button willcome on.

The air recirculation button will not be ac-tivated when the air conditioner is in DEFmode.

Air flow control (MODE)

Pushing the MODE button selects the airoutlet to:

: Air flows from center and sideventilators.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

DUAL ZONE BUTTON (if soequipped)

You can set the temperature of the driverand front passenger sides individually.

Pushing the DUAL zone button changesthe setting position as follows:

Driver/Passenger → Driver → Passenger

If selecting the Driver/Passenger positionagain after the temperature is individuallyset, the display will show the temperatureset for the driver side.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The outside ambient temperature will beshown on the center display.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. The sensormay be affected by road or engine heat,

wind direction and other driving condi-tions. The display may differ from the ac-tual outside temperature or the tempera-ture displayed on various signs or bill-boards.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature andoutside air temperature are low, the airflow from the foot outlets may not operatefor a maximum of 150 seconds. However,this is not a malfunction. After the coolanttemperature warms up, the air flow fromthe foot outlets will operate normally.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The sensor jA on the instrument panelhelps maintain a constant temperature;do not put anything on or around thissensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equippedwith an in-cabin microfilter which collectsdirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure airconditioner heats, defogs, and ventilatesefficiently, replace the filter in accordancewith the maintenance schedule in theINFINITI Service and maintenance guide.To replace the filter, contact an INFINITIdealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flowdecreases significantly or if windows fogup easily when operating the heater orair conditioning system.

The air conditioning system in yourINFINITI vehicle is charged with a refrig-erant designed with the environment inmind. This refrigerant will not harm theearth’s ozone layer. However, specialcharging equipment and lubricant are re-quired when servicing your INFINITI airconditioner. Using improper refrigerantsor lubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioning system. See “Ca-pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for air condi-tioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations.

An INFINITI dealer will be able to serviceyour environmentally friendly air condi-tioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-erant under high pressure. To avoid per-sonal injury, any air conditioner serviceshould be done only by an experiencedtechnician with proper equipment.

HA1011-A

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition and press the POWER, FM or AMbutton to turn on the radio. If you listento the radio with the engine not running,the key should be turned to the ACC posi-tion.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio trans-mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains andother external influences. Intermittentchanges in reception quality normally arecaused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhanceradio reception. These circuits are de-signed to extend reception range, and toenhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general charac-teristics of FM, AM and satellite radio sig-nals that can affect radio receptionquality in a moving vehicle, even whenthe finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in agiven reception area, and do not indicate

any malfunction in your radio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is notthe ideal place to listen to a radio. Be-cause of the movement, reception condi-tions will constantly change. Buildings,terrain, signal distance and interferencefrom other vehicles can work againstideal reception. Described below aresome of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural(single channel) FM having slightly morerange than stereo FM. External influencesmay sometimes interfere with FM stationreception even if the FM station is within25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distancebetween the transmitter and receiver. FMsignals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib-iting many of the same characteristics aslight. For example they will reflect off ob-jects.

SAA0306

AUDIO SYSTEM


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fade and drift: As your vehicle movesaway from a station transmitter, the sig-nals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position, usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter, static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control counterclockwise to reducetreble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-flective characteristics of FM signals, di-rect and reflected signals reach the re-ceiver at the same time. The signals maycancel each other, resulting in momentaryflutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low fre-quency, can bend around objects andskip along the ground. In addition, thesignals can be bounced off the iono-sphere and bent back to earth. Becauseof these characteristics. AM signals arealso subject to interference as they travelfrom transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle ispassing through freeway underpasses or

in areas with many tall buildings. It canalso occur for several seconds duringionospheric turbulence even in areaswhere no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-trical power lines, electric signs and eventraffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is first installedor the battery has been replaced, the sat-ellite radio may not work properly. This isnot a malfunction. Wait more than 10minutes with satellite radio ON for satel-lite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed (retrofit unavailablewithout factory satellite radio pre-wiring),and an XM® or SIRIUSTM satellite radioservice subscription is active.

Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the sat-ellite antenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact Disc (CD) player

O During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

O The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the passenger compartmenttemperature is extremely high. De-crease the temperature before use.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12cm) round discs that have the “COM-PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo onthe disc or packaging.

O Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints,or that have pin holes may not workproperly.

O The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

• Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

• Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

• Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion.

• 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

• CDs that are not round

• CDs with a paper label

• CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

O CDs with MP3 or WMA format cannotbe written by this audio system.

O If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

• Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

• Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the tempera-ture inside the player is too high. Re-move the CD by pushing the EJECTbutton, and after a short time reinsertthe CD. The CD can be played whenthe temperature of the player returnsto normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audiosystem (only MP3 CD).

SAA0480


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic-tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.MP3 is the most well known com-pressed digital audio file format. Thisformat allows for near “CD quality”sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion ofan audio track from CD-ROM can re-duce the file size by approximately10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptibleloss in quality. MP3 compression re-moves the redundant and irrelevantparts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)is a compressed audio format createdby Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.The WMA codec offers greater filecompression than the MP3 codec, en-abling storage of more digital audiotracks in the same amount of spacewhen compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the numberof bits per second used by a digitalmusic files. The size and quality of acompressed digital audio file is deter-

mined by the bit rate used when en-coding the file.

O Sampling frequency — The rate atwhich the samples of a signal are con-verted from analog to digital (A/D con-version) per second.

O Multisession — Multisession is one ofthe methods for writing data to media.Writing data once to the media iscalled a single session, and writingmore than once is called a multises-sion.

O ID3 Tag — The ID3 tag is the part ofthe encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digitalmusic file such as song title, artist, al-bum title, encording bit rate, tracktime duration, etc. ID3 tag informationis displayed on the Album/Artist/Tracktitle line on the display.

* Windows and Windows Media areregistered trademarks and trademarksin the United States of America andother countries of Microsoft Corpora-tion of the USA.

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with MP3 orWMA is as illustrated above.

O The folder names of folders not con-

SAA1025


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

taining MP3/WMA files are not shownin the display.

O If there is a file in the top level of thedisc, “ROOT” is displayed.

O The playback order is the order inwhich the files were written by thewriting software, so the files might notplay in the desired order.

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systemsISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-ported.

Supported versions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levelsFolder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including routefolder), Files: 512

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOMBig Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16BOM Little Endian)

* Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit ratecannot be played.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before us-ing the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will beplayed.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes andnumber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time be-fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required beforethe music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., mightnot match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the nextsong when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited bycopyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in thedesired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the de-sired order.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. CD EJECT button2. CD play button3. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select

button4. Audio display5. PTY/CAT (Type A), SSV (Type B) button6. DISP (Display) CHANGE button7. SEEK, APS REW/APS FF, TRACK CHANGE

button8. CD LOAD button9. POWER ONzOFF button, Volume control

knob10. AUTOzP (Automatic preset) button11. RPT (repeat) play (Type A), RPT (repeat)

play/CAT button (Type B)12. SCAN tuning button13. Station preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD insert

or CD play select button14. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-

ANCE, SSV (Type A only)) button15. RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (BASS,

TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SSV (Type Aonly)) ADJUSTING button

* No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed (retrofit unavailablewithout factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUSTM satel-lite radio service subscription is active.

SAA0937Type A

SAA0938Type B


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennasprinted on the rear window. This systemautomatically switches to the antennawhich is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the lowfrequency range automatically in bothradio reception and CD playback.

POWER on/off:

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, and then push the POWER on/offbutton while the system is off to call up themode (radio, tape or CD) which was playingimmediately before the system was turnedoff. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radiowill come on. While the system is on, push-ing the POWER on/off button turns the sys-tem off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive control

Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, SSV (Type A only)):

Press the AUDIO button to change the se-lecting mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE →SSV (Type A only) → (Normal) → BASS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance,press the AUDIO button until the desiredmode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCEappears in the display. Press the TUNE (

or ) button to adjust Bass andTreble to the desired level. Use the or

button also to adjust Fader or Balancemodes. Fader adjusts the sound level be-tween the front and rear speakers and Bal-ance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MIDor HIGH, press the or (TUNE)button (Type A) or press the SSV button(Type B).

After 10 seconds, the radio, or CD displayreappears. Once the sound quality is set tothe desired level, press the AUDIO buttonrepeatedly until the radio, or CD display ap-pears.

DISPLAY CHANGE:

This button will work during FM radio, sat-ellite radio (if so equipped) and CD opera-tion. Find the detailed function in the de-scription of each item.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the band select button willchange the band as follows:

(Without satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

(With satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT1 → SAT2 → AM

No satellite radio reception is available un-less optional satellite receiver and antennaare installed (retrofit unavailable withoutfactory satellite radio pre-wiring), and anXM® or SIRIUSTM satellite radio servicesubscription is active.


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

When the RADIO band select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the radio will comeon at the station last played.

The last station/channel played will alsocome on when the ONzOFF/VOL controlknob is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing whenthe RADIO button is turned to ON, theother audio source will automatically beturned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glowduring FM stereo reception. When the ste-reo broadcast signal is weak, the radiowill automatically change from stereo tomonaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while drivingso full attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

Use these buttons for manual tuning. Tomove quickly through the channels, hold

either of the TUNE buttons down for morethan 0.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

For AM and FM radio:

Push the SEEK button or , totune from high to low or low to high fre-quencies and stops at the next broadcast-ing station.

For satellite radio:

Push the SEEK button or toseek channels of the next or previous cat-egory.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune fromlow to high frequencies and stops at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push-ing the button again during this 5 sec-onds period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that sta-tion.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves tothe next station.

DISPLAY:

O By pushing the DISP button for morethan 1.5 seconds while receiving FM

radio waves, “PS-NAME” switches be-tween ON and OFF (Type A only).

O Pushing the DISP button will displayadditional information about the satel-lite radio broadcast (for example:Artist name, Title).Keep pushing the DISP button, and itwill change the information of the sat-ellite radio broadcast to be displayedas follows:CH Number → CH Name → ArtistName → Song Title → CH Number

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set forthe FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2),twelve for satellite radio (six for SAT1, sixfor SAT2) and six stations can be set forthe AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using theSEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station/channeland keep pushing any of the desiredstation preset buttons (1 to 6) until abeep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then comeon and the sound will resume. Memo-rizing is now complete.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse blows, the preset station memorywill be erased. In that case, reset the de-sired stations.

Automatic preset:

To select the preset FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P buttonfor less than 1.5 seconds.

To preset the FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P buttonfor more than 1.5 seconds.

Program type/category (Type A)

Repeat/category (Type B):

When the PTY button is pressed for morethan 1.5 seconds during FM mode, thePTY name of the current tuned station isdisplayed (Type A only). During this timeif the PTY data code is zero, or the data isunreadable; the display will show NONE.

When the PTY (CAT) — type A, or RPT (CAT)— Type B, button is pressed for more than1.5 seconds during the satellite radiomode, the category name of the currentchannel is displayed.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be doneby the up/down TUNE button or

in the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) nameby one step, with one push of theup/down tuning button or .

PTY name selection can also be achievedby pressing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the stationpreset buttons; but these can be changedby pressing the station preset buttons formore than 1.5 seconds when the desiredPTY name is in the display.

2. PTY SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY name, push theSEEK button or within 10seconds. Tuning to the PTY station willstart. If you do not push the SEEKbutton within the 10 second period,the PTY mode will be canceled.

3. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tunethe PTY name station, and stop ateach broadcasting station for 5 sec-


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

onds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCANtuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station. If the SCAN tuningbutton is not pushed within 5 sec-onds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

Compact disc (CD) changeroperation

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, push the LOAD button and insertthe compact disc into the slot with the la-bel side facing up. The CD will be guidedautomatically into the slot and start play-ing.After loading the disc, the number oftracks on the disc and the play time willappear on the display.If the radio is already operating, it willautomatically turn off and the CD willplay.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into the slot.This could damage the player.

If the system has been turned off whilethe CD was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control button will start thecompact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pushthe LOAD button for less than 1.5 sec-onds. Select the loading slot by pushingthe CD insert select button (1 to 6), theninsert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-cession, push the LOAD button for morethan 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminateon the display.

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded,the system will turn on and the compactdisc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with theCD loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

DISPLAY:

When the display button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the music information dis-played can be changed in the followingorder.(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind):

(CD)

When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the CD will playwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. Whenthe button is released, the CD will returnto normal play speed.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X


When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the folders in the CD will bechanged.

When the or button is pushedfor more than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the CD will play while fastforwarding or rewinding. When the buttonis released, the CD will return to thenormal play speed.

APS (Automatic ProgramSearch) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the CD is being played, the programafter the present one will start to playfrom its beginning. Push several times toskip through programs. The CD will ad-vance the number of times the button ispushed. (When the last program on theCD is skipped through, the first programwill be played.) When the (APS REW)button is pushed, the program beingplayed returns to its beginning. Push sev-eral times to skip back through programs.The CD will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

CD PLAY select button:

To change CD, push the CD play selectbutton (1 to 6).

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the beginning of all the CDprograms in each track will be played for10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushedfor more than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the first program in all theCDs will be played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10second period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves tothe next disc program.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while theCD is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:(CD)


CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed withthe CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD se-lect button, push the EJECT button for lessthan 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT but-ton for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the CDis being played, CD will come out and thesystem will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed,it will be pulled back into the slot to pro-tect it.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the displaywhen the CD is loaded with the systemon.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc. Do not bendthe disc.

O Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or alcohol intended for indus-trial use.

O A new disc may be rough on its inner

and outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pen-cil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. Power on/off switch3. MODE select switch4. Memory changezSeek and APS switch

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIOCONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated usingthe controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition switch turned to the ACCor ON position, push the POWER switch toturn the audio system on or off.

SAA0451 SAA0974


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to changethe mode in the sequence of AM, FM1,FM2, SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if soequipped) and CD.

Volume control switches

Push the volume control switch to in-crease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch or forless than 1.5 seconds to change the radiofrequency.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the nextor previous radio station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APSREW:

(CD)

Push the tuning switch or forless than 1.5 seconds to return to the be-ginning of the present program or skip tothe next program. Push several times toskip back or skip through programs.

This system searches for the blank inter-vals between selections. If there is ablank interval within one program or thereis no interval between programs, the sys-tem may not stop in the desired or ex-pected location.


Push the tuning switch or morethan 1.5 seconds to change the folders (ifit has folders).

Push the tuning switch or forless than 1.5 seconds to return to the be-ginning of the present program or skip tothe next program.

Disc change (except CD with MP3 orWMA):

Push the tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change theplaying disc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside therear window.

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

O When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your INFINITI, be sure to ob-serve the following cautions, otherwisethe new equipment may adversely affectthe Engine control system and other elec-tronic parts.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellulartelephones while driving.

O If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic control mod-ules.

O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harness. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2Three way catalyst ...................................... 5-3Low tire pressure warning system .............. 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover .................... 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............. 5-5AWD driving safety precautions ................. 5-5

Ignition switch (except Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................................ 5-6

Automatic transmission............................... 5-6Manual transmission ................................. 5-7Key positions .............................................. 5-7INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ......... 5-8

Ignition knob (models with the Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................................ 5-8

Ignition knob positions............................... 5-9INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ......... 5-9

Before starting the engine.............................. 5-10Starting the engine ........................................ 5-10Driving the vehicle ......................................... 5-11

Automatic transmission............................. 5-11Manual transmission ................................ 5-15

Parking brake................................................. 5-18Cruise control................................................. 5-19

Precautions on cruise control.................... 5-20Cruise control operations .......................... 5-20

Break-in schedule........................................... 5-21Increasing fuel economy ................................ 5-22AWD warning light (if so equipped) ................ 5-22Parking/parking on hills................................. 5-24Power steering ............................................... 5-25Brake system ................................................. 5-25

Braking precautions .................................. 5-25Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................... 5-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ........... 5-27Cold weather driving ...................................... 5-29

Freeing a frozen door lock ........................ 5-29Antifreeze.................................................. 5-29Battery ...................................................... 5-29Draining of coolant water.......................... 5-29Tire equipment.......................................... 5-29Special winter equipment.......................... 5-30Driving on snow or ice .............................. 5-30Engine block heater (if so equipped)......... 5-30

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not leave children, impaired adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with therear seatback and trunk lid securelylatched when not in use, and preventchildren’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It cancause unconsciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

O Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length oftime.

O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compartment.If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

• Open all the windows.

• Set the air recirculation switch OFFand the fan control at high to circu-late the air.

O If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommenda-tion to prevent carbon monoxide entryinto the vehicle.

O If a special body, camper, or otherequipment is added for recreational orother usage, follow the manufacturer’srecommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle. (Somerecreational vehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. mayalso generate carbon monoxide.)

O The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

• Your vehicle is raised while beingserviced.

• You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passenger compart-ment.

• You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

• You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaustsystem. Exhaust gas in the converter isburned at high temperatures to help re-duce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep people, ani-mals or flammable materials away fromthe exhaust system components.

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by an INFINITI dealer.

O Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damagingthe three-way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine while warming itup.

O Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.When the low tire pressure warning lightis lit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated.

The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also,this system may not detect a sudden dropin tire pressure (for example, a flat tirewhile driving).

Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This maycause the low tire pressure warning lightto illuminate.

If the warning light illuminates in low am-bient temperatures as described above,check the tire pressure for all four tires.Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.

Frequently check the tire pressure and ad-just the pressure of each tire properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with a lowtire pressure (lower than 25 psi: Sedan17 inch and Coupe 17 inch wheel model /27 psi: Sedan 18 inch wheel model / 28psi: Coupe 18 and 19 inch wheel model),the low tire pressure warning light comeson, and the chime sounds for about 10seconds.

For additional information regarding theabove warning, see “Warning/indicatorlights and audible reminders” in the “2.Instruments and controls” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressure

for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible. (See“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for changing a flat tire.)

O When a spare tire is mounted or awheel is replaced, the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and the lowtire pressure warning system will not func-tion properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe andprudent manner may result in loss of con-trol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud-den steering maneuvers. These drivingpractices could cause you to lose controlof your vehicle. As with any vehicle, aloss of control could result in a collisionwith other vehicles or objects, or causethe vehicle to rollover, particularly if theloss of control causes the vehicle to slidesideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never driveunder the influence of alcohol or drugs(including prescription or over-the-counterdrugs which may cause drowsiness). Al-ways wear your seat belt. See “Seatbelts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section. Also instruct your passengers todo so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollovercrash, an unbelted or improperly beltedperson is significantly more likely to beinjured or killed than a person properlywearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving after drink-ing alcohol increases the likelihood ofbeing involved in an accident injuring your-self and others. Additionally, if you are in-jured in an accident, alcohol can increasethe severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. Youmust not drive under the influence of al-cohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related acci-dents. Although the local laws vary onwhat is considered to be legally intoxi-cated, the fact is that alcohol affects all

people differently and most people under-estimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’tmix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs).Don’t drive if your ability to operate yourvehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, orsome other physical condition.

AWD DRIVING SAFETYPRECAUTIONS

WARNING

O Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with AWDengaged. Accelerating quickly, sharpsteering maneuvers or sudden brakingmay cause loss of control.

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O This vehicle is not designed for off-road(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandyor muddy roads that tires may getstuck in.

O Do not place an AWD equipped vehicleon a two wheel dynamometer or raisetwo wheels off the ground and shift thetransmission to any D (drive) or R (re-verse) position. Doing so may result intransmission damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

O Never operate the accelerator pedalwith any wheels raised and the otherwheels on the ground while jacking upor with any wheels on a roller and theother wheels on the ground. Otherwise,the vehicle could lurch forward or back-ward.

O When a wheel is off the ground due toan unlevel surface, do not spin thewheel excessively.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes an anti-theftsteering lock device. On automatic trans-mission models, the ignition lock is de-signed so that the key cannot be turnedto LOCK and removed until the selectorlever is moved to the P position.

If the selector lever is not returned to theP position, the key cannot be moved to-ward LOCK.

When removing the key from the ignitionswitch, make sure the selector lever is inthe P position.

When the key cannot be turned towardthe LOCK position, proceed as follows toremove the key:

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-sition.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK posi-tion.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignitionswitch, the selector lever cannot bemoved from the P position. The selectorlever can be moved if the ignition switchis in the ON position and the foot brakepedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position jA in betweenLOCK and ACC, although it does not showon the lock cylinder. When the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position the steeringwheel is not locked.

In order to lock the steering wheel, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn coun-terclockwise from the straight up posi-tion.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the keyto the LOCK position. Remove the key.

SSD0083J

IGNITION SWITCH (except IntelligentKey system)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey and turn it gently while rotating thesteering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes an anti-theftsteering lock device.

On manual transmission models, the igni-tion lock is designed so that the key can-not be turned to LOCK and removed un-less the key is pushed in while turningthe key between ACC and LOCK jA .

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/6 of aturn clockwise from the straight up posi-tion.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key

to the LOCK position. Remove the key.

To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey and turn it gently while rotating thesteering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage and/or personal in-jury.

KEY POSITIONS

The ignition switch includes an anti-theftsteering lock device.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removedwhen the ignition switch is in this posi-tion.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off withoutlocking the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

SSD0082K


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

key cannot be turned to LOCK and re-moved until the selector lever is moved tothe P position (for automatic transmis-sion) or the key is pushed in while turningthe key between ACC and LOCK.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-ries when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position activates ignition system inaddition to electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor,starting the engine.


The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered INFINITI VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If the engine fails to start using the regis-tered INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key, it may be due to interferencecaused by another INFINITI Vehicle Im-mobilizer System key, an automated tollroad device or automated payment device

on the key ring. Restart the engine usingthe following procedures:



3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) away from the registeredINFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing theregistered INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key on a separate key ring toavoid interference from other devices.

The ignition lock is designed so that theignition knob cannot be turned to LOCKand removed until the selector lever ismoved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition knob, makesure the selector lever is in the P position.

If the selector lever is not returned to theP position, the ignition knob cannot bemoved toward LOCK.

When the ignition knob cannot be turnedtoward the LOCK position, proceed as fol-lows:

SPA1628

IGNITION KNOB (models with theIntelligent Key system)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-sition.

2. Turn the ignition knob slightly in theON direction.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK posi-tion.

The selector lever can be moved from Pposition if the ignition knob is in the ONposition and the foot brake pedal is de-pressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCKand ACC, although it does not show onthe lock cylinder. When the ignition is inOFF the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/6 of aturn counterclockwise from the straightup position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the igni-tion knob to the LOCK position. To unlockthe steering wheel, push the ignitionknob in and turn it gently while rotatingthe steering wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equippedwith the Intelligent Key system is dis-charged, the ignition knob cannot beturned from the LOCK position, even

using the mechanical key or valet key.

WARNING

Never turn the ignition knob to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage and/or personal in-jury.

IGNITION KNOB POSITIONS

Push in the ignition knob to the jB rangewhen you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition knob can only be locked inthe jA position.

The ignition knob will be unlocked whenit is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-sition jD while carrying the IntelligentKey.

ACC (Accessories) jD :

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position) jE :

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

START jF :

This position starts the engine. As soonas the engine has started, release theknob immediately. It will automatically re-turn to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section.

The ignition knob cannot be turned backto the LOCK position unless the shift leveris in P position. (It can be turned to onlyjC .)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionknob in ACC or ON positions when the en-gine is not running for an extended period.This can discharge the battery.


The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

will not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered INFINITI VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If the engine fails to start using the regis-tered INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key, it may be due to interferencecaused by another INFINITI Vehicle Im-mobilizer System key, an automated tollroad device or an automated payment de-vice on the key ring. Restart the engineusing the following procedures:



3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing theregistered INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem key on a separate key ring toavoid interference from other devices.

O Make sure the area around the vehicleis clear.

O Make sure the periodical maintenanceis being performed.

O Make sure all windows and lights areclean.

O Make sure of the proper inflation oftires and their conditions.

O Make sure to lock all doors.

O Make sure to adjust seats and headrestraints.

O Make sure to adjust inside and out-side mirrors.

O Make sure to fasten seat belts and di-rect all passengers to do likewise.

O Make sure to check the operation ofwarning lights when the key is turnedto the ON (3) position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to P or N. (Ppreferred.)

The starter is designed so that thestarter does not operate unless the se-lector lever is in either one of theabove positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to the N position.Depress the clutch pedal fully to thefloor.

The starter is designed so that it doesnot operate unless the clutch pedal isfully depressed.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (4)to crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Release the keywhen the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-peat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the accelerator pedala little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)and while holding, crank the engine.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Release the key and the acceleratorpedal when the engine starts.

O If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to6 seconds. After cranking the engine,release the accelerator pedal. Crankthe engine with your foot off the ac-celerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key whenthe engine starts. If the engine starts,but fails to run, repeat the above pro-cedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15seconds at a time. If the engine does notstart, turn the key off and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwise thestarter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race theengine while warming it up. Drive atmoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. In

cold weather, keep the engine runningfor a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes beforeshutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of timemay make the vehicle more difficult tostart.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your ve-hicle is electronically controlled by atransmission control module to producemaximum efficiency and smooth opera-tion.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-ommended operating procedures for thistransmission. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance anddriving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal and push the selector le-ver button before shifting the selectorlever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Besure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-tempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-signed so that the foot brake pedal mustbe depressed before shifting from P(Park) to any drive position while the ig-nition switch is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of the

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

other gear positions if the ignition switchis turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC posi-tion or if the key is removed from theswitch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand push the selector lever button toshift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then gradually start the vehiclein motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manualshift mode. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed.Failure to do so could cause you to losecontrol and have an accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

O On slippery roads, do not downshift.This may cause a loss of control.

O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while vehicle is moving forward. Nevershift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while ve-hicle is moving rearward. Failure to doso could cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose. To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressingthe brake pedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and shift the selector leverfrom P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive), or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R(Reverse). All other positions can be se-lected without pushing the button.

SSD0413


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for anyreason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse),N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, thekey cannot be turned to LOCK and be re-moved from the ignition switch. Move theselector lever to P (Park) position, thenthe key can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicleis parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped. The brake pedal must be de-pressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever fromN (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).Apply the parking brake. When parking ona hill, apply the parking brake first, thenmove the lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always besure the vehicle is completely stopped be-fore selecting R (Reverse). The brakepedal must be depressed and the se-lector lever button pushed in to move theselector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) orany drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicleis moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from Dto the manual shift gate with the vehicle

stopped or while driving, the transmissionenters the manual shift mode. Shift rangecan be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift rangeis displayed on the position indicator inthe meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

1M

→← 2M

→← 3M

→← 4M

→← 5M

5M (5th):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

4M (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.

3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

1M (1st):

Use this position when climbing steephills slowly or driving slowly throughdeep snow, sand or mud, or for maximumengine braking on steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lower


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

than 4M range. This reduces gas mile-age.

O When shifting up, move the selectorlever to the + (up) side. (Shifts tohigher range.)

O When shifting down, move the se-lector lever to the − (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

O Moving the selector lever rapidly tothe same side twice will shift theranges in succession.

O When canceling the manual shiftmode, return the selector lever to theD position. The transmission returnsto the normal driving mode.

O In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear. This helps maintain driving per-formance and reduces the chance ofvehicle damage or loss of control.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down to 1stgear before the vehicle comes to a stop.When accelerating again, it is necessaryto shift up to the desired range.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisshifts the transmission down into thelower gear, depending on the vehiclespeed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, thenext time the key is turned to the ON po-sition, the light will blink for ap-proximately 8 seconds after coming on for2 seconds. While the vehicle can bedriven under these circumstances pleasenote that the gears in the automatictransmission will be locked in 4th gear.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheel spin-ning and subsequent hard braking, thefail-safe system may be activated. Thiswill occur even if all electrical circuits arefunctioning properly. In this case, turnthe ignition switch to the OFF positionand wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the keyback to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operatingcondition. If it does not return to its nor-mal operating condition, have an

INFINITI dealer check the transmissionand repair if necessary.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,the selector lever may not be moved fromthe P (Park) position even with the brakepedal depressed and the selector leverbutton pushed.

To move the selector lever, release theshift lock and push the selector lever but-ton. The selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel willbe locked unless the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

To release the shift lock, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover jA .

4. Insert a suitable tool in the shift lockslot, and push down jB .

5. Push the selector lever button jC andmove the selector lever to N (Neutral)position jD while holding down theshift lock.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition to unlock the steering wheel.Now the vehicle may be moved to thedesired location.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P(Park), have an INFINITI dealer check theautomatic transmission system as soonas possible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting ordown shifting, fully depress the clutchpedal, shift into the appropriate gear,then slowly and smoothly release theclutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a shortthrow shifter manual transmission. To en-sure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shiftlever. If the clutch pedal is not fully de-pressed before the transmission is

SSD0477 SSD0287


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in se-quence according to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever andthen move it to the R (Reverse) positionafter stopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever intoR (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift to N(Neutral), and then release the clutchpedal once. Fully depress the clutch pedalagain and shift into R or 1.

WARNING

O Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

O Do not over-rev the engine whenshifting to a lower gear. This may causea loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

O Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This may damagethe clutch.

O Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

O Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

O When the vehicle is stopped for a pe-riod of time, for example at a stoplight, shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brake ap-plied.

Up-shift indicator

The manual transmission up-shift indi-cator is located in the instrument paneland shows the driver the time to shift intoa higher gear by illuminating. The use ofthe up-shift indicator will help you to up-shift at a constant engine speed (rpm)from any gear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashingwhen the engine speed is within about500 rpm of the set figure while driving,and then illuminate after the enginespeed reaches the set figure.

SSD0432


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

For example, you can use the up-shift in-dicator when driving as follows:

O If the maximum engine speed is de-sired, set the figure at 7,000 rpm. (Theindicator starts flashing from about6,500 rpm and comes on steady at7,000 rpm.)

O If the maximum engine torque is de-sired, set the figure at 4,800 rpm. (Theindicator starts flashing from about4,300 rpm and comes on steady at4,800 rpm.)

O If you want to break in your vehicle,use of the up-shift indicator with arather low figure will help you to avoidthe high engine speed.

To make the up-shift indicator not comeon, set the figure at above 7,900 rpm.

There may be a slight difference betweenthe timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-nation and the tachometer indication.

Up-shift indicator setting:

The desired engine speed (rpm) for theup-shift indicator can be set while the up-shift indicator setting mode is selected.Change the display to the up-shift indica-tor mode by pushing the reset knob j1 .When the up-shift indicator setting modeis selected, the engine speed currentlyset is displayed. (The initial factory set-ting is 8,000 rpm.) The figure can bechanged between 2,000 and 8,000 rpm.

Push the reset knob more than approxi-mately 2 seconds and then the figure inthe display will start blinking.

Pushing the reset knob for less than ap-proximately 1 second while the figure isblinking will add the figure by 100 rpm. Ifpushing for more than approximately 1second, the figure will increase by 500rpm.

If you have not operated the reset knobfor 5 seconds, the setting mode will end.The display will illuminate instead ofblink.

If the battery cable is disconnected, theset engine speed will be returned to theinitial figure (8,000 rpm).

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehiclespeeds for shifting into a higher gear.These suggestions relate to fuel economyand vehicle performance. Actual up-shiftspeeds will vary according to road condi-tions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-eas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 16 (26)3rd to 4th 25 (40)

SSD0433


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

4th to 5th 28 (45)5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitudeareas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 15 (24)2nd to 3rd 25 (40)3rd to 4th 40 (64)4th to 5th 45 (72)5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed ineach gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine isnot running smoothly, or if you need toaccelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggestedspeed (shown below) in any gear. Forlevel road driving, use the highest gearsuggested for that speed. Always observeposted speed limits, and drive accordingto the road conditions, which will ensuresafe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it maycause engine damage or loss of vehiclecontrol.

Gear MPH (km/h)1st 35 (56)2nd 60 (96)3rd 85 (136)4th —5th —6th —

Automatic transmission model

To apply: Fully depress the parking brakepedal jA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal jA

and the parking brake will be re-leased.

3. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

SPA1286E

PARKING BRAKE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Manual transmission model

To apply: Pull the lever up j1 .

To release:

1. Firmly apply foot brake.

2. While pulling up on the lever slightly,push the button j2 and lower com-pletely.

3. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

O Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

O When it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed.

O In heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed.

O On winding or hilly roads.

O On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

O In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off immedi-ately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

PD1001MD

CRUISE CONTROL


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it cancels automatically. TheSET indicator light on the meter panelthen blinks to warn the driver.

O If the engine coolant temperature be-comes excessively high, the cruisecontrol system will be canceled auto-matically.

O If the SET indicator light blinks, turnthe cruise control main switch off andhave the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

O The SET indicator light may blink whenthe cruise control main switch isturned on while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch.To properly set the cruise controlsystem, perform the preceding stepsin the order indicated.

1. ACCEL or RESUME switch

2. COAST or SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ONzOFF switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at aspeed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144km/h) without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push themain switch on. The CRUISE indicatorlight on the meter panel will come on.

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. (TheSET indicator light will come on.) Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal. Yourvehicle will maintain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steephills. If this happens, drive withoutthe cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow eitherof these three methods:

a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indi-cator light will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicatorlight will go out.

c) Turn the main switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and SET indicatorlights will go out.

O If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RES/ACCEL set switch andreset at the cruising speed, turn themain switch off once and then turn iton again.

SSD0428


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O The cruise control will automaticallybe cancelled if the vehicle slows downbelow approximately 8 MPH (13km/h).

O Depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission), or move the selector le-ver to the N (Neutral) position (auto-matic transmission). The SET indicatorlight will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the COAST/SETswitch.

b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL setswitch. When the vehicle attains thespeed you desire, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release theRES/ACCEL set switch. Each time youdo this, the set speed will increase byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,

push the COAST/SET switch and re-lease it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, theset speed will decrease by about 1MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The ve-hicle will resume the last set cruisingspeed when the vehicle speed is over 25MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and ensurethe future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle. Failure to follow these recom-mendations may result in shortened enginelife and reduced engine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow. Donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavyload for the first 500 miles (800 km).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-tain cruising speeds with a constantaccelerator position.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the high-way. Driving at high speed will lowerfuel economy.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-ing. Maintain a safe distance behindother vehicles.

O Use a proper gear range which suitsroad conditions. On level roads, shiftinto high gear as soon as possible.

O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodicmaintenance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correctpressure. Low pressure will increasetire wear and waste fuel.

O Keep the front wheels in correct align-ment. Improper alignment will causenot only tire wear but also lower fueleconomy.

O Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it ismore economical to use the air condi-tioner and leave the windows closedto reduce drag.

The AWD warning light is located in themeter.

The AWD warning light comes on whenthe key switch is turned to ON. It turns offsoon after the engine is started.

SSD0336

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY AWD WARNING LIGHT (if so equipped)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-tem while the engine is running, thewarning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (abouttwice per second) while trying to free astuck vehicle due to high power train oiltemperature. The driving mode maychange to 2 wheel drive. If the warninglight blinks rapidly during operation, stopthe vehicle with the engine idling in asafe place immediately. Then if the lightgoes off after a while, you can continuedriving.

A large difference between the diametersof front and rear wheels will make thewarning light blink slowly (about once pertwo seconds). Pull off the road in a safearea, and idle the engine. Check that alltire sizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNING

Do not attempt to test an AWD equippedvehicle with two wheels on a two wheel dy-namometer and the other two wheelsraised. Doing so may result in transmissiondamage or unexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

CAUTION

O Do not operate the engine on a freeroller when any of the wheels areraised.

O If the warning light comes on whiledriving there may be a malfunction inthe AWD system. Reduce the vehiclespeed and have your vehicle checkedby an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

O Never drive on dry hard surface roadsin the SNOW mode, as this will overload the power train and may cause

aserious malfunction.

O If the warning light remains on afterthe above operation, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soonas possible.

O The power train may be damaged if youcontinue driving with the warning lightblinking rapidly.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattended insidethe vehicle.

O Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park).Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away andresult in an accident.

O Make sure the shift lever has beenpushed as far forward as it can go andcannot be moved without depressingthe button at the end of the lever.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphillgrade, place the shift lever in the 1(Low gear) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle fromrolling into the street when parked ona sloping drive way, it is a good prac-tice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1

Turn the wheels into the curb andmove the vehicle forward until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2

Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move away fromthe center of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK po-sition and remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hydrau-lic pump, driven by the engine, to assiststeering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns or at lowspeeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will be muchharder to operate.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, youcan stop the vehicle by depressing thebrake pedal. However, greater foot pres-sure on the brake pedal will be required tostop the vehicle and the stopping distancewill be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will belonger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly tapping the brake pedalto heat-up the brakes. Do this until thebrakes return to normal. Avoid driving thevehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenverthe stopping effect of the parking brake is

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


Z 05.2.24/V35-D/V5.0 X

weakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drums\rotors are replaced, inorder to assure the best braking perfor-mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual and can be performed byyour INFINITY dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will cause overheatingof the brakes, increases wear on the brakesand pads, and reduces gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or acceler-ating could cause the wheels to skid andresult in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist for thebrakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls thebrakes so the wheels will not lock whenbraking abruptly or when braking on slipperysurfaces. The system detects the rotationspeed at each wheel and varies the brakefluid pressure to prevent each wheel fromlocking and sliding. By preventing wheellockup, the system helps the driver maintainsteering control and helps to minimizeswerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so mayresult in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock brake system will not operateat speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h)to stop the vehicle. (The speeds will varyaccording to road conditions.) When theanti-lock system senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuator(under the hood) rapidly applies and re-leases hydraulic pressure (like pumpingthe brakes very quickly). While the actuatoris working, you may feel a pulsation in thebrake pedal and hear a noise or vibrationfrom the actuator under the hood. This isnormal and indicates that the anti-lock sys-tem is working properly. However, the ABSoperation may indicate that road condi-tions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists ofelectronic sensors, electric pumps, and hy-draulic solenoids controlled by a computer.The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-ture that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle at alow speed in forward or reverse. When theself-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and is not an indica-


Z 05.2.24/V35-D/V5.0 X

tion of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches theanti-lock brake system OFF and turns onthe ABS warning light in the instrumentpanel. The brake system will then behavenormally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self check,or while you are driving, you should takeyour vehicle to an INFINITI dealer for re-pair at your earliest convenience.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticateddevice, but it cannot prevent accidents re-sulting from careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain vehicle con-trol during braking on slippery surfaces, butremember that the stopping distance on slip-pery surfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with the anti-lock brake system.Stopping distances may also be longer onrough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain a safedistance from the vehicle in front of you. Ulti-mately, the responsibility for safety of self andothers rests in the hands of the driver.

Tire type and condition of tires may also af-fect braking effectiveness.

O When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

O When installing a spare tire, make sure itis the proper size and type as specifiedon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See “Vehicle identification” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section for Tire and Loading Informationlabel location.

When accelerating or driving on slipperysurfaces, the tires may spin or slide. Withthe Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system,sensors detect these movements and con-trol the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability.

O When the VDC system is operating, the“SLIP” indicator in the instrumentpanel blinks.

O When only the Traction Control System(TCS) portion of the VDC system is oper-ating, the “SLIP” indicator in the instru-ment panel blinks.

O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the roadconditions are slippery. Be sure to ad-just your speed and driving to theseconditions. Be sure to drive carefully.See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicledynamic control off indicator light” inthe “2. Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system,the “SLIP” and indicator lights il-luminate in the instrument panel.As long as these warning lights are on,the VDC function is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


Z 05.2.24/V35-D/V5.0 X

ited Slip Differential (ABLS) system to im-prove vehicle traction. The ABLS systemworks when one of the driving wheels isspinning on a slippery surface. The ABLSsystem brakes the spinning wheel whichdistributes the driving power to the otherdrive wheel. If the vehicle is operatedwith the VDC system turned off, all VDCsystem functions and TCS functions willbe turned off. The ABLS system and ABSwill still operate with the VDC system off.The ABLS system is activated, the “SLIP”indicator light will blink and you may heara clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is notan indication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from underthe hood. This is normal and indicatesthat the VDC system is working properly.

The VDC system computer has a built indiagnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed forward orbackward. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pul-sation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

O The VDC system is designed to help im-prove driving stability but does not pre-vent accidents due to abrupt steeringoperation at high speeds or due tocareless or dangerous driving. Reducevehicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slipperysurfaces and always drive carefully.

O If engine related parts such as mufflerare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-dicator light and “SLIP” indicator lightmay come on.

O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not INFINITI-approved or are extremely deteriorated,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect vehiclehandling performance, and the “VDCOFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate.

O If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicatorlights may illuminate.

O When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control systemmay not operate properly and the “VDCOFF” indicator light may illuminate. Donot drive on these types of roads.

O When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine afterdriving onto a stable surface.

O If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and the “VDCOFF” indicator light may illuminate.

O The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snow-covered road.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing,apply de-icer or glycerin to it through thekey hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heatthe key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated thatthe temperature will drop below 32°F(0°C), check antifreeze to assure properwinter protection. For additional informa-tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, see “Battery”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system byopening the drain plug located under the

radiator. Refill before operating the ve-hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, INFINITI recommends theuse of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASONtires on all four wheels. Please consultan INFINITI dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability in-formation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some provinces and states prohibittheir use. Check local, state and pro-vincial laws before installing studdedtires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, maybe poorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired.

Make sure they are of proper size forthe tires on your vehicle and are in-stalled according to the chain manu-facturer’s suggestions. However, someprovinces and states prohibit theiruse. Check local state and provinciallaws before installing tire chains. Useonly SAE Class S chains. Class “S”chains are used on vehicles with re-stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Ve-hicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the SAE stan-dard minimum clearances between thetire and the closest vehicle suspen-sion or body component required toaccommodate the use of a winter trac-tion device (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size.Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recom-mended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose endlinks of the tire chain must be securedor removed to prevent the possibilityof damage to the fenders or under-body. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. Inaddition, drive at a reduced speed.Otherwise, your vehicle may be dam-aged and/or vehicle handling and per-

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

formance may be adversely affected.

O Never install tire chains on TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tires.

O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

O Tire chains must be installed only onthe rear wheels and not on the frontwheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Drivingwith chains in such conditions cancause damage to the various mecha-nisms of the vehicle due to some over-stress.

4. For all wheel drive:If you install snow tires, they mustalso be the same size, brand, con-struction and tread pattern on all fourwheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the followingitems be carried in the vehicle duringwinter:

O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

O a sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

O a shovel to dig the vehicle out ofsnow-drifts.

O extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

O Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshiftingtoo fast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

O Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

An engine block heater to assist extremecold temperature starting is availablethrough an INFINITI dealer.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an ungroundedelectrical system or tow-pronged (cheater)adapters. You can be injured by an elec-trical shock if you use an ungrounded con-nection.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system .............. 6-2Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-3

Jump starting.................................................... 6-8Push starting.................................................. 6-10

If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-11Towing your vehicle........................................ 6-12

Towing recommended by INFINITI............ 6-12Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle) ..................................................... 6-15

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistanceplan. In the event of a roadsideemergency, Roadside Assistance Serviceis available to you. Please refer to yourWarranty Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &Roadside assistance information booklet(Canada) for details. Both the WarrantyBooklet and Roadside Assistance CallingCard in your Owner’s Literature Portfolioprovide the Toll-Free Number to call forassistance. Roadside Assistance isprovided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,for 4 years from the date sold to giveemergency roadside help, in the event ofmechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s)such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery,lost keys, mechanical breakdown,accident, etc.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare.When the low tire pressure warning lightis lit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated. If equipped, thesystem also displays pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the displayscreen by sending a signal from a sensorthat is installed in each wheel. If the ve-hicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure (lower than 25 psi: Sedan 17 inchand Coupe 17 inch wheel model / 27 psi:Sedan 18 inch wheel model / 28 psi:Couple 18 and 19 inch wheel model), thelow tire pressure warning system will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tirepressure warning light in the meter panel.This system will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH(32 km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section and “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or awheel is replaced, tire pressure will notbe indicated and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the roadaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the manual trans-mission into the R (Reverse) position(automatic transmission into the P(Park) position).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,and to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure the parking brake is se-curely applied and the manual trans-mission is shifted into R (Reverse), orthe automatic transmission into P(Park).

O Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

O Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance. Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks j1 at both the frontand back of the wheel diagonally oppo-site the flat tire to prevent the vehiclefrom moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

In case of emergency 6-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools 1 and spare tire 2from the storage area located inside thetrunk as illustrated.

If spacers are equipped, remove them be-fore removing the spare tire.

SCE0382BSedan — Type A

SCE0563Sedan — Type B

SCE0383BSedan


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

1. Place the jack directly under thejack-up point as illustrated above sothat top of the jack contacts the ve-hicle at the jack-up point. Align thejack head between the two notches inthe front or the rear as shown. Also fitthe groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

SCE0424BCoupe

CE1089-AJack-up point


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or twoturns by turning counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rodwith both hands as shown above. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then re-move the tire.

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

O Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicle onother vehicles.The jack is designed for lifting only

your vehicle during a tire change.

O Never use any other part of the vehiclefor jack support.

O Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

O Never use blocks on or under the jack.

O Do not start or run the engine while ve-hicle is on the jack. This is especiallytrue for vehicles with limited slip differ-entials.

O Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

SCE0504


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

(Coupe models)

When replacing a front tire, make surethe hole in the spare tire wheel is

aligned with the pin on the brakerotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illus-trated (j1 , j2 , j3 , j4 , j5 ). Lower thevehicle completely.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

O Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts after the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.). As soon as possible tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked forthree hours or more or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

SCE0039


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Securely store the flat tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and thetrunk floor carpeting over the dam-aged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

O The T-type spare tire and small sizespare tire are designed for emergencyuse. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster bat-tery, the instructions and precautionsbelow must be followed.

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

O Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

SCE0384BSedan

SCE0425ACoupe

JUMP STARTING


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated bat-tery can damage your vehicle.

O Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do notlean over the battery when jumpstarting.

O Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personal in-jury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles tobring their batteries into close proxim-ity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shiftlever to the N (Neutral) position (Onautomatic transmission models, movethe selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion). Switch off all unnecessary elec-trical systems (light, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with anold cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-

SCE0539


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

quence as illustrated.

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) to positive(+) and negative (−) to body ground,not to the battery.

O Make sure jumper cables do not touchmoving parts in the engine compart-ment and that the cable clamps do notcontact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and startyour engine in the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefullydisconnect the negative cable andthen the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).Be sure to dispose of the cloth used tocover the vent holes as it may be con-taminated with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot bepush started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet(Canada).

PUSH STARTING


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

O Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicatedby an extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc., takethe following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,apply the parking brake and move theshift lever to the N (Neutral) position(automatic transmission to the P(Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch.Open all the windows, move theheater or air conditioner temperaturecontrol to maximum hot and fan con-trol to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, runthe engine at a fast idle (approxi-mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera-ture gauge indication returns tonormal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood. (Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine.) Do not open the hood fur-ther until no steam or coolant can beseen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water.

If coolant is leaking or the cooling fandoes not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

O Be careful not to allow your hands,hair, jewelry or clothing to come intocontact with, or to get caught in, theengine belts or the engine cooling fan.

O The engine cooling fan can start at anytime when the coolant temperature ishigh.

7. After the engine cools down, checkthe coolant level in the reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolantto the reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at anINFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-vincial in Canada) and local regulationsfor towing must be followed. Incorrecttowing equipment could damage your ve-hicle. Towing instructions are availablefrom an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-erators are generally familiar with the ap-plicable laws and procedures for towing.To assure proper towing and to preventaccidental damage to your vehicle,INFINITI recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisableto have the service operator carefully readthe following precautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

O Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

O Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet(Canada).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITI

Two wheel drive modelsINFINITI recommends that your vehiclebe towed with the driving (rear) wheels

SCE0386Two wheel drive models

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

off the ground or place the vehicle on aflat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmission mod-els with the rear wheels on the ground

or four wheels on the ground (forwardor backward) as this may cause seriousand expensive damage to the transmis-sion. If it is necessary to tow the ve-hicle with the front wheels raised, al-ways use towing dollies under the rearwheels.

O When towing rear wheel drive modelswith the front wheels on the ground oron towing dollies:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion, and secure the steering wheel in astraight ahead position with a rope orsimilar device. Never secure thesteering wheel by turning the ignitionkey to the LOCK position. This maydamage the steering lock mechanism.

O If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground (ifyou do not use towing dollies):

O Always release the parking brake.

O Move the transmission shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position.

SCE0387AAutomatic transmission models


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Observe the following restricted towingspeeds and distances for manual trans-mission models only:

O Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

O Distance: Less than 500 miles (800km)

If the speed or distance must necessarilybe greater, remove the propeller shaft be-fore towing to prevent damage to thetransmission.

All wheel drive models

INFINITI recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle, or thevehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as il-lustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thepower train.

SCE0488All wheel drive models


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

After removing the front license plate (orthe bumper cover), securely install thetowing hook j1 . (Located with jackingtools.)

Reinstall the license plate on the lower fit-ting point.

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

O Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the vehicle recovery hooks ormain structural members of the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle body will bedamaged.

O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow a vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

O Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front of the vehicle. Never pull thevehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or cooling sys-tems.

O Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem.

2. Make sure the area in front and be-hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and leftto clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

O Shift back and forth between R (re-verse) and D (drive).

O Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

O Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

SCE0524


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professionaltowing service to remove the vehicle.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2Washing...................................................... 7-2Waxing........................................................ 7-2Removing spots .......................................... 7-3Underbody .................................................. 7-3Glass .......................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels ............................... 7-3Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3

Cleaning interior............................................... 7-3

Floor mats................................................... 7-4Seat belts ................................................... 7-4

Corrosion protection......................................... 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion..................................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion..................................................... 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-5

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to care for itproperly.

To protect the paint surfaces, pleasewash your vehicle as soon as you can.

O After a rainfall to prevent possibledamage from acid rain.

O After driving in coastal areas to pre-vent possible damage from sea salt.

O When foreign objects, such as soot,bird droppings, tree sap, metal par-ticles, or insects get on the paint sur-faces.

O When dust or mud builds up on thepaint surfaces.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside garage or in covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, parkin a shady area or protect the vehicle witha body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHING

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the ve-hicle with a wet sponge and plenty of

clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughlyusing a mild soap such as Nissan CarWash, or a general purpose dishwashingliquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (neverhot) water.

CAUTION

O Do not use strong household soap,strong chemical detergents, gasoline orsolvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot,as the surface may become water-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removing caked-ondirt or other foreign substances so thepaint surface is not scratched or dam-aged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty ofclean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt.

Therefore, these areas must be regularlycleaned. Make sure that the drain holesin the lower edge of the door are open.Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and washaway road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paintsurface by using a damp chamois to drythe vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up wax residue and to avoid aweathered appearance before re-applyingwax.

If you wish to wax your vehicle, only usea wax specified for use over clear coats,such as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. AnINFINITI dealer can assist you inchoosing the proper product.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O If the surface does not polish easily,use a road tar remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paintfinish may dull the finish or leave swirlmarks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos-sible from the surface of the paint toavoid lasting damage or staining. Specialcleaning products are available at anINFINITI dealer or any automotive acces-sory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used inwinter, the underbody must be cleanedregularly. This will prevent dirt and saltfrom building up and causing underbodyand suspension corrosion. Before thewinter period and again in the spring, theunderseal must be checked and, if neces-sary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It isnormal for glass to become coated with a

film after the vehicle is parked in the hotsun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electricalconductors, radio antenna elements or rearwindow defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used.Salt could discolor the wheel if not re-moved.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats usinga vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe thevinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,soft cloth dampened in mild soap solu-tion, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations.Some fabric protectors contain chemicalsthat may stain or bleach the seat mate-rial.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, toclean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use gasoline, thinner, or anysimilar material.

O The leather seats should be regularlycoated with a leather wax like saddlesoap. Never use car wax.

O Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

FLOOR MATS

The use of Genuine INFINITI floor matscan extend the life of your vehicle carpetand make it easier to clean the interior.No matter what mats are used, be surethey are fitted for your vehicle and areproperly positioned in the footwell to pre-vent interference with pedal operation.Mats should be maintained with regularcleaning and replaced if they become ex-cessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid(Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor matbracket jA to act as a floor mat posi-tioning aid. INFINITI floor mats havebeen specially designed for your vehiclemodel. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Simplyposition the mat by placing the floor matbracket through the floor mat grommethole while centering the mat in thefloorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain thatthe mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely before using them.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemi-cal solvents to clean the seat belts, sincethese materials may severely weaken theseat belt webbing.SAI0012A


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION:

O The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION:

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle, and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially thoseareas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate therate of corrosion to those parts which arenot well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of saltin the air in coastal areas, or heavy roadsalt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-cess. Road salt will also accelerate thedisintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION:

O Wash and wax your vehicle often tokeep it clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

O Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, washwith water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

O NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debrisfrom the passenger compartment bywashing it out with a hose. Remove dirtwith a vacuum cleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floorpan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult an INFINITI dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ............................... 8-2General maintenance........................................ 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items............... 8-3Maintenance precautions ................................. 8-5Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7Engine cooling system...................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9

Engine oil ....................................................... 8-10Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10Changing engine oil and filter .................. 8-11

Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 8-13Power steering fluid ....................................... 8-14Brake and clutch fluid .................................... 8-14

Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14Clutch fluid .............................................. 8-15

Window washer fluid ...................................... 8-15Battery ........................................................... 8-16

Jump starting ............................................ 8-18Drive belts...................................................... 8-18Spark plugs.................................................... 8-19

Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-19Air cleaner...................................................... 8-20

Windshield wiper blades ................................ 8-20Cleaning.................................................... 8-20Replacing .................................................. 8-21

Parking brake and brake pedal ...................... 8-22Checking parking brake ............................ 8-22Checking brake pedal ............................... 8-22Brake booster ........................................... 8-23

Fuses ............................................................. 8-24Engine compartment ................................. 8-24Passenger compartment............................ 8-26

Keyfob battery replacement............................ 8-27Keyfob (except Intelligent Key) ................. 8-27Intelligent Key .......................................... 8-28

Lights............................................................. 8-30Headlights ................................................ 8-32Exterior and interior lights ........................ 8-32

Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-36Tire pressure............................................. 8-36Tire labeling.............................................. 8-39Types of tires ............................................ 8-41Tire chains ................................................ 8-42Changing wheels and tires........................ 8-43

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your new INFINITI has been designed tohave minimum maintenance requirementswith longer service intervals to save youboth time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen-tial to maintain your INFINITI’s good me-chanical condition, as well as its emissionand engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure that the specified maintenance andthe general maintenance are performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the onlyone who can ensure that your vehicle re-ceives the proper maintenance care. Youare a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required andoptional scheduled maintenance itemsare described and listed in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”. Youmust refer to that guide to ensure thatnecessary maintenance is performed onyour INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes thoseitems which should be checked duringnormal day-to-day operation. They are es-sential for proper vehicle operation. It is

your responsibility to perform these main-tenance procedures regularly as pre-scribed.

Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill andonly a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be doneby you, a qualified technician, or, if youprefer, an INFINITI dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through tech-nical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They arecompletely qualified to work on INFINITIvehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITIdealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in areliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smell, be sure tocheck for the cause or have an INFINITIdealer perform it promptly. In addition,you should notify an INFINITI dealer ifyou think the repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” later in this section.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCEITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that alldoors and the engine hood operate prop-erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-curely. Lubricate hinges and latches ifnecessary. Make sure that the secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights,stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,and other lights are all operating properlyand installed securely. Also check head-light aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts): Whenchecking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loosewheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure inall tires, including the spare, to the speci-fied pressure. Check carefully for damage,cuts or excessive wear.

Tire rotation*:Sedan: The tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km) to minimize tirewear variation.

Coupe: The tires cannot be rotated.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If thevehicle should pull to either side whiledriving on a straight and level road, or ifyou detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancingmay be needed.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield atleast every six months for cracks or otherdamage. Have a damaged windshield re-paired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-erly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing periodic maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort.Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in the P (Park) position without apply-ing any brakes.

Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully.Check the brake booster function. Be sureto keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake*: Check that the pedal/lever has the proper travel and confirm thatyour vehicle is held securely on a fairlysteep hill with only the parking brake ap-plied.

Seats: Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. toensure they operate smoothly and that alllatches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints move upand down smoothly and that the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched posi-tions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (For example, buckles, an-chors, adjusters and retractors) operateproperly and smoothly, and are installedsecurely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure thatall warning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operatingthe heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properlyand that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (For example, eachtime you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.It should be between the MAX and MINlines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-tures or under severe conditions requirefrequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make surethat the brake and clutch fluid levels arebetween the MAX and MIN lines on the res-ervoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no beltis frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level location andturning off the engine. (Wait at least


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

10 minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.)

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-diately locate the trouble and correct it.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for exhaust gas (Carbon monox-ide).

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks afterthe vehicle has been parked for a while.Water dripping from the air conditionerafter use is normal. If you should noticeany leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi-dent, check for the cause and have it cor-rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold andthe engine is turned off. Check the linesfor proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front ofthe radiator and clean off any dirt, in-sects, leaves, etc., that may have accumu-lated. Make sure the hoses have nocracks, deformation, deterioration orloose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to controldust. It is very important to remove thesesubstances, otherwise rust will form onthe floor pan, frame, fuel lines andaround the exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, beingcareful to clean those areas where mudand dirt may accumulate. For additionalinformation, see “Cleaning exterior” inthe “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the tank.

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injuryto yourself or damage to the vehicle. Thefollowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For a manual transmis-sion, move the shift lever to N (Neutral)position. For an automatic transmissionmodels, move the selector lever to P(Park).

O Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

O If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

O It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

O If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

O Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank and bat-tery.

O On gasoline engine models with theMultiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by an INFINITI dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

O Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-ness connector disconnected while theignition switch is in the ON position.

O Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section gives instructions regarding onlythose items which are relatively easy foran owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is

also available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in oper-ating difficulties or excessive emissions,and could affect your warranty coverage.If in doubt about any servicing, have itdone by an INFINITI dealer.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Air cleaner

SDI1485

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round,anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-sion inhibitors, therefore additionalcooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Wait until the engine andradiator cool down. Serious burns couldbe caused by high pressure fluid es-caping from the radiator.

O See “If your vehicle overheats” in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

O The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine Nissan Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with theproper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and50% demineralized water/distilled water.The use of other types of engine coolantmay damage your engine cooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to

Antifreeze

Deminer-alizedwater/

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoirtank when the engine is cold. If the cool-ant level is below MIN j2 , add coolant upto the MAX j1 level. If the reservoir tankis empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If thereis insufficient coolant in the radiator, fillthe radiator with coolant up to the filleropening and also add it to the reservoirtank up to the MAX level j1 .

If the engine cooling system frequently

SDI1385B

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

requires coolant, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

O Major cooling system repairs shouldbe performed by an INFINITI dealer.The service procedures can be found

in the appropriate INFINITI ServiceManual.

O Improper servicing can result in re-duced heater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING

O To avoid being scalded, never changethe coolant when the engine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

O Keep coolant out of reach of childrenand pets.

1. Open radiator drain plug jA at thebottom of radiator, and remove ra-diator filler cap jB .

O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-tact drive belts.

O Waste coolant must be disposed of

SDI0114B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

properly. Check your local regula-tions.

2. Close the radiator drain plug securelyafter the coolant is drained.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the propermixture of antifreeze solution anddemineralized water/distilled water.Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAXlevel. Then install the radiator fillercap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up untilit reaches normal operating tempera-ture. Then race the engine 2 or 3times under no load. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge for signs ofoverheating.

5. Stop the engine. After it completelycools down, refill the radiator up tothe filler opening. Fill the reservoirtank up to the MAX level. Check thedrain plug for any sign of leakage.

6. Recheck the coolant level after the ve-hicle has been driven for a day.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than10 minutes for the oil to drain backinto the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick jA and wipe itclean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between theH and L marks jB . If the oil level isbelow the L mark jA , remove the oilfiller cap and pour recommended oilthrough the opening. Do not overfilljC .

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the se-verity of operating conditions.

SDI1386D SDI1781

ENGINE OIL


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL ANDFILTER

Change the engine oil and filter accordingto the maintenance intervals shown in theINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 10 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

O Place the safety jack stands under thevehicle jack-up points.

O A suitable adapter should be attachedto the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at thecenter point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts that holdthe undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and supportpoints are used to avoid vehicle damage.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under thedrain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.3. Remove the drain plug jA with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the en-gine oil is hot.

O Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

O Check your local regulations.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench jB . Remove the oil filter byturning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mountingsurface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gas-ket remaining on the mounting sur-face of the engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tightenadditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:11 to 15 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plugwith a new washer. Securely tightenthe drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oiland install the cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place toprevent oil spillage from the dipstick holewhile filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technicaland consumer information” section fordrain and refill capacity. The drain andrefill capacity depends on the oil tem-perature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Al-ways use the dipstick to determine theproper amount of oil in the engine.

CAUTION

When filling oil, do not pull out the dip-stick.

10. Start the engine and check forleakage around the drain plug andthe oil filter. Correct as required.

SDI1520B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

11. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 10 minutes. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into po-sition as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clipout.

b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-tion.

c. Insert the clip through the undercoverinto the hole in the frame, then pushthe center of the clip in to lock the clipin place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold theundercover in place. Be careful not tostrip the bolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-erly.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

If checking or replacement is required, werecommend an INFINITI dealer for servic-ing.

CAUTION

O Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

O Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theINFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmissionfluid is also described on caution labelslocated in the engine compartment.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

The fluid level should be checked usingthe HOT range at fluid temperatures of122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using theCOLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equiva-lent.

For additional brake fluid specification in-formation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-nical and consumer information” section.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or con-taminated fluid may damage the brake sys-tem. Do not add synthetic brake fluid. Theuse of improper fluids can damage thebrake system and affect the vehicle’s stop-ping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surface withwater.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir jA . Ifthe fluid is below the MIN line j2 or thebrake warning light comes on, add Genu-ine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAXline j1 . If fluid must be added frequently,the system should be thoroughly checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1408A SDI1569A

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir jA . Ifthe fluid level is below the MIN. line j2 ,add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy DutyBrake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid upto the MAX. line j1 .

If fluid is added frequently, the systemshould be thoroughly checked by anINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed container.Old, inferior or contaminated fluid maydamage the clutch system.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, wash the surface with water.

Add fluid when the low washer fluidwarning light comes on. Add a washersolvent to the water for better cleaning.In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufactur-er’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

SDI1478B SDI1388B

WINDOW WASHER FLUID


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out ofthe reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution. Thismay result in damage to the paint.

O Keep the battery surface clean anddry. Any corrosion should be washedoff with a solution of baking soda andwater.

O Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30days or longer, disconnect the (−)negative battery terminal cable to pre-vent discharging it.

Coupe

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed fromthe battery terminal, do not close either offront doors. The automatic window ad-justing function will not work, and the sideroof panel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) batteryterminal, perform the procedure in thefollowing order. Otherwise, the windowand the side roof panel may contact andbe damaged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) batteryterminal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery termi-nal, perform the procedure in the fol-lowing order. Otherwise, the window andthe side roof panel may contact and bedamaged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door.Do not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery ter-minal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side doorwindow.

5. Close the driver side door and thewindow.

BATTERY


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sedan and coupe

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, gener-ated by battery fluid, is explosive. Donot allow battery fluid to contact yourskin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.After touching a battery or battery cap,do not touch or rub your eyes. Thor-oughly wash your hands. If the acidcontacts your eyes, skin or clothing,immediately flush with water for atleast 15 minutes and seek medical at-tention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

O When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

O Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

O Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the UPPER LEVEL j1and LOWER LEVEL j2 lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to the in-dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-fill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

1. Remove the cell plugs jA .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPERLEVEL j1 .

DI0137MA


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the side of the battery is not visible,the electrolyte level can be checkedthrough each filler opening as illus-trated.

3. Tighten cell plugs jA .

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. If the engine does not start byjump starting, the battery may have to bereplaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Fan

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

.: Tension checking points

SDI1480 SDI1389

DRIVE BELTS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotate un-expectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhe-sion or looseness. If the belt is inpoor condition or loose, have it re-placed or adjusted by an INFINITIdealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly forcondition and tension in accordancewith the maintenance schedule in theINFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to removethe spark plugs. An incorrect socket candamage the spark plugs.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see anINFINITI dealer for servicing.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace theplatinum-tipped jA spark plugs as fre-quently as the conventional type sparkplugs since they will last much longer.Follow the maintenance schedule but, donot reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace with recommendedplatinum-tipped spark plugs.

SDI0145D

SPARK PLUGS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

If maintenance is required, see anINFINITI dealer for servicing.

The filter element should not be cleanedand reused. Replace it according to themaintenance intervals. See the INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide. When re-placing the filter, wipe the inside of theair cleaner housing and the cover with adamp cloth.

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there,and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the aircleaner removed, and be careful whenworking on the engine with the aircleaner removed.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine with theair cleaner removed. Doing so could re-sult in serious injury.

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when theengine hood is opened.

O Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass, otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

O Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other ma-terial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blade with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the lock pin jA , then remove thewiper blade.

3. Insert the new wiper blade to thewiper arm until a click sounds.

If necessary, clean the windshield washernozzle jA with a needle or small pin jB .

DI1018MD

SDI1730


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

Pedal type

From the released position, depress theparking brake pedal slowly and firmly, andcheck the distance between the initial andfinal position of the pedal jA . If it is out ofthe range shown below, see an INFINITIdealer.

Range: 2 to 3 notches under a depressingforce of 44 lb (196 N)

Lever type

From the released position, pull theparking brake lever up slowly and firmly. Ifthe number of clicks is out of the range jA

listed below, see an INFINITI dealer.

Range: 6 to 7 clicks under pulling force of44 lb (196 N)

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the dis-tance between the upper surface of thepedal and the metal floor. If it is out of therange (A) shown below, see an INFINITIdealer.

Range: 3.74 in (95 mm) or more under a de-pressing force of 110 lb (490 N)

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every

SDI1391F SDI1447B DI1020MO

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does not re-turn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brakepad requires replacement, it will make ahigh pitched scraping or screechingsound when the vehicle is in motionwhether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops isnormal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information,see the appropriate maintenance log

shown in the INFINITI Service and Main-tenance Guide.

High performance sports brake pads oc-casionally make squeaks, squeals orother braking noises because of their veryhigh friction coefficient.

These occasional brake noises arenormal, but if they continue, see anINFINITI dealer.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as fol-lows:

1. With the engine off, press and releasethe brake pedal several times. Whenbrake pedal movement (distance oftravel) remains the same from onepedal application to the next, continueon to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal,start the engine. The pedal heightshould drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stopthe engine. Keeping the pedal de-pressed for about 30 seconds, thepedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for one minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turn

it off. Depress the brake pedal severaltimes. The pedal travel distance willdecrease gradually with each depres-sion as the vacuum is released fromthe booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, seean INFINITI dealer.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Two types of fuses are used. Type jA isused in the fuse boxes in the engine com-partment. Type jB is used in the passen-ger compartment fuse box.

Type jA fuses are provided as sparefuses. They are stored in the passengercompartment fuse box.

Type jA fuses can be installed in the en-gine compartment and passenger com-partment fuse boxes.

If a type jA fuse is used to replace a typejB fuse, the type jA fuse will not be levelwith the fuse pocket as shown in the il-lustration. This will not affect the perfor-mance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse isinstalled in the fuse box securely.

Type jB fuses cannot be installed in theunderhood fuse boxes. Only use type jAfuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and head-light switch are in the OFF position.

SDI1751 SDI1752 SDI1392A

FUSES


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Open the engine hood and remove thecover on the battery and thefuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holdercover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open jA , replace it witha new fuse jB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition,check the fusible links. If any of thesefusible links are melted, replace only withgenuine NISSAN parts.

SDI1753


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are in the OFF posi-tion.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open jA , replace it witha new fuse jB .

5. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1393 SDI1753Type A

SDI1754Type B


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

KEYFOB (EXCEPT INTELLIGENTKEY)

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool jA .

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or threetimes to check its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuitboard and the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it gets wet, immediately wipeit completely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

SDI1731

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTELLIGENT KEY

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery and removed parts.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove themechanical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver jA

wrapped with a cloth into the slit jB

of the corner and twist it to separatethe upper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

O Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as it could cause amalfunction.

Recommended battery: CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts, and then push them togetheruntil it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times tocheck its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuitboard and the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device pursuant to part 15of the FCC Rules (j1 : the certificationnumber). These limits are designed toprovide reasonable protection againstharmful interference in a residential in-stallation. This equipment generates,uses and can radiate radio frequency en-ergy and, if not installed and used in ac-

SDI1786 SDI1787


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

cordance with the instructions, maycause harmful interference to radio com-munications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occur in aparticular installation. If this equipmentdoes cause harmful interference to radioor television reception, which can be de-termined by turning the equipment offand on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna

— Increase the separation between theequipment and the receiver

— Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sedan

1. Front turn signal light, Clearance light

2. Front fog light/Headlight (high-beam)

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. Trunk light

9. High-mounted stop light(if so equipped)

10. License plate light

11. Back-up light

12. Rear combination light(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Side marker)

SDI1732

LIGHTS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe

1. Front turn signal light, Clearance light

2. Front fog light/Headlight (high-beam)

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Clearance light

5. Map light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. High-mounted stop light(if so equipped)

9. Trunk light

10. License plate light

11. Rear combination light(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Back-up, Sidemarker)

SDI1579


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

If replacement is required, see anINFINITI dealer.

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at an INFINITI dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlight andturn signal switch” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal* 21 T20

Clearance light* 5 T10

Front side marker light 3.8 T10

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 T20

Stop/Tail* (LED) —

Side marker light* Sedan: (LED)/Coupe: 3.8 Sedan: —/Coupe: T10

Back-up light 18 T16

License plate light 5 T10

High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

Map light 8 —

Rear personal light (Sedan) 8 —

Step light 5 —

Trunk light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 1.32 —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C orD. When replacing a bulb, first remove thelens and/or cover.

MDI0006

SDI1733Front side marker light

SDI1570ASedan — Rear turn signal lightMaintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

To replace a back up light

1. Remove all the clips jA , the handle jB

and inside release handle jC to re-move the trunk lid finisher.

2. Remove the connector from bulbsocket j1 .

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwisej2 and remove the bulb.

SDI1510ASedan — Back-up light


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

SDI1734Map light

SDI1399DSedan — Rear personal light

SDI1400AStep light

SDI1258BTrunk light


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE PRESSURE

Low tire pressure warning system

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare.When the low tire pressure warning lightis lit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly underinflated.

The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also,this system may not detect a sudden dropin tire pressure (for example a flat tirewhile driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section, “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “6.In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressure of the tires (in-cluding the spare) often and always priorto long distance trips. The recommendedtire pressure specifications are shown onthe Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Recommended Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure” heading. The Tire andLoading Information label is affixed to thedriver side center pillar. Tire pressuresshould be checked regularly because:

O Most tires naturally lose air over time.

O Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be check whenthe tires are cold. The tires are consid-ered COLD after the vehicle has beenparked for 3 or more hours, or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

SDI1407DVanity mirror light

SDI1401BLicense plate light

WHEELS AND TIRES


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-denly and cause an accident.

O The vehicle weight capacity is indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading your vehiclemay result in reduced tire life, unsafeoperating conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyond thespecified capacity may also result in amalfunction of other vehicle compo-nents.

O Before taking a long trip, or wheneveryou heavily load your vehicle, use a tirepressure gauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specified level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH(137 km/h) unless it is equipped withhigh speed rated tires. Driving fasterthan 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in

tire malfunction, loss of control andpossible injury.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Tire and loading information label

j1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that can beseated in the vehicle.

j2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the Technical and consumerinformation section.

j3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

j4 Recommended cold tire inflation pres-sure: Inflate the tires to this pressurewhen the tires are cold. Tires are con-sidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) atmoderate speeds. The recommendedcold tire inflation is set by the manu-facturer to provide the best balance oftire wear, vehicle handling characteris-tics, driveability, tire noise, etc. basedon the vehicle’s GVWR.

j5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”later in this section.

j6 and j7 Spare tire size or compactspare tire size (if soequipped)

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem sideways,or air will escape. If the hissing soundof air escaping from the tire is heardwhile checking the pressure, reposi-tion the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

SDI1574


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare it to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add or re-lease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare. (Refer to the“Wheels and tires” section) TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamental char-acteristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TIN canbe used to identify the tire in case of a re-call.

j1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. (Not alltires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This numbergives the width in millimeters of thetire from sidewall edge to sidewalledge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

SDI1575 SDI1606


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Two-digit number (16): This number isthe wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Speed Rating. The speed rating de-notes the speed at which a tire is de-signed to be driven for extended peri-ods of time. The ratings range from 98miles per hour (MPH) to 186 MPH.(You may not find this information onall tires because it is not required bylaw.) j2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Departmentof Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or tothe left or right of the Tire Iden-tification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identi-fication mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. For example,the numbers 3103 means the 31stweek of 2003.

SDI1607


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

j3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire.Tire manufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.

j4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sureThis number is the greatest amount ofair pressure that should be put in thetire. Do not exceed the maximum per-missible inflation pressure.

j5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds that canbe carried by the tire. When replacingthe tires on the vehicle, always use atire that has the same load rating asthe factory installed tire.

j6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates that the tire requires aninner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-less”).

j7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown, if the tirehas radial structure.

j8 Manufacturer or Brand nameManufacturer or Brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology

In addition to the many terms that are de-fined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears while letteringor bears manufacturer, brand and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward racing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

O When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., summer, all season or snow) andconstruction. An INFINITI dealer maybe able to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

O Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.


All season tiresINFINITI specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/orM&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires havebetter snow traction than all season tiresand may be more appropriate in some ar-eas.

Summer tiresINFINITI specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recom-mends the use of snow or all season tireson all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessaryto select tires equivalent in size and loadrating to the original equipment tires. Ifyou do not, it can adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lowerspeed ratings than factory equipped tiresand may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy oricy conditions, INFINITI recommends theuse of snow or all season tires on all fourwheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial laws be-fore installing studded tires. Skid andtraction capabilities of studded snowtires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

All wheel drive models

CAUTION

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfer caseand differential gears.

O ONLY use spare tires specified for theAWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is rec-ommended that all four tires be replacedwith tires of the same size, brand, con-struction and tread pattern. The tire pres-sure and wheel alignment should also bechecked and corrected as necessary. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Driving

with chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When install-ing tire chains, make sure they are ofproper size for the tires on your vehicleand are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. Use only SAEclass S chains. Class “S” chains are usedon vehicles with restricted tire to vehicleclearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains are designed to meet the SAEstandard minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspen-sion or body component required to ac-commodate the use of a winter tractiondevice (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Othertypes may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended bythe tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damageto the fenders or undercarriage. If pos-sible, avoid fully loading your vehiclewhen using tire chains. In addition, drive


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve-hicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be ad-versely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a T-type sparetire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY). Do not usethe chains on dry roads.

Driving with chains in such conditions cancause damage to the various mechanismsof the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (Sedan)

INFINITI recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section for tire replacing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each tire rotation interval.

Tire rotation (Coupe)

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle, asfront tires are a different size from reartires and the direction of the wheel rota-tion is fixed for each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to pre-vent the rear wheels from being installedin place of the front wheels. The sparetire can be installed in place of the frontand rear wheels. When installing thespare tire in the front wheel, the hole inthe spare tire wheel must be aligned withthe pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, check and ad-just the tire pressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

DI0048-DSedan


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not include the T-type spare tire orany other small size spare tire in thetire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically inspectedfor wear, cracking, bulging or objectscaught in the tread. If excessive wear,cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

O The original tires have built-in tread

wear indicators. When the wear indica-tors are visible, the tire(s) should be re-placed.

O Improper service of the spare tire mayresult in serious personal injury. If it isnecessary to repair the spare tire, con-tact an INFINITI dealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. See “Specifica-tions” in the “9. Technical and consumerinformation” section for recommendedtypes and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than those rec-ommended or the mixed use of

MDI0004C


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

tires of different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect the ride,braking, handling, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clear-ance, speedometer calibration, head-light aim and bumper height. Some ofthese effects may lead to accidents andcould result in serious personal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad wear.

O When a spare tire is mounted or awheel is replaced, the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting. (For models with the

low tire pressure warning system)

O Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could malfunction withoutwarning.

O The use of retread tires is not recom-mended.


CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.Failure to do so may result in a circumfer-ence difference between tires on the frontand rear axles which will cause excessivetire wear and may damage the transmis-sion, transfer case and differential gears

(AWD models).

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regularuse, wheels can get out of balance. There-fore, they should be balanced as re-quired.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing thevehicle to maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheelswhen the wheel is changed or the un-derside of the vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at thetire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the roadwheels be waxed to protect againstroad salt in areas where it is usedduring winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire (T-type))

Observe the following precautions if theT-type spare tire must be used, otherwiseyour vehicle could be damaged or in-volved in an accident.

CAUTION

O The T-type spare tire should be usedonly for an emergency. It should be re-placed by a standard tire at the firstopportunity.

O Drive carefully while the T-type sparetire is installed.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt brakingwhile driving.

O Periodically check the T-type spare tireinflation pressure, and always keep itat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

O With the T-type spare tire installed, donot drive your vehicle at speeds fasterthan 50 MPH (80 km/h).

O When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the T-type spare tireshould be used on the front wheel andthe original tire used on the rearwheels (drive wheels). Use tire chainsonly on the rear two original tires (Se-dan).

O Tire tread of the T-type spare tire willwear at a faster rate than the originaltire. Replace the T-type spare tire assoon as the tread wear indicators ap-pear.

O Do not use the T-type spare tire onother vehicles.

O Do not use more than one T-type sparetire at the same time.

O Do not tow a trailer while the T-typespare tire is installed.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on a T-type sparetire. Tire chains will not fit properly onthe T-type spare tire and may causedamage to the vehicle.

O Because the T-type spare tire is smallerthan the original tire, ground clearanceis reduced. To avoid damage to the ve-hicle do not drive over obstacles. Alsodo not drive the vehicle through an au-tomatic car wash since it may getcaught.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number .......... 9-6Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations......................... 9-7

Specifications................................................... 9-8Engine......................................................... 9-8Wheels and tires......................................... 9-9Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country.............................................. 9-10Vehicle identification...................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate ......................................................... 9-10Vehicle identification number(Chassis number) ...................................... 9-10Engine serial number ................................ 9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..................... 9-11Emission control information label ............ 9-12Tire and loading information label ............ 9-12

Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-13Installing front license plate .......................... 9-13Vehicle loading information............................ 9-14

Terms........................................................ 9-14Vehicle load capacity ................................ 9-16Loading tips.............................................. 9-16

Towing a trailer .............................................. 9-17Maximum load limits................................. 9-17Towing load/specification ......................... 9-19Towing safety............................................ 9-19Flat towing ................................................ 9-22

Uniform tire quality grading ........................... 9-23Emission control system warranty .................. 9-24Reporting safety defects (US only).................. 9-24Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) ................................................. 9-24Event data recorders ...................................... 9-25Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation ................................................... 9-26

In the event of a collision......................... 9-26

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedureinstructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)RecommendedspecificationsUS

measureImp

measure Liter

Fuel*1 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76Engine oil*8Drain and refill

With oil filter change 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7 O API Certification Mark*2, *3O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3Without oil filter change 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4

Cooling systemWith reservoir 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.7

Genuine Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalentReservoir 7/8 qt 3/5 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF*4

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*5

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or CANADA NISSAN Automatic Trans-mission Fluid*6

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instruc-tions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*10

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No. 116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*9Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalentWindshield washer fluid — — — Genuine Nissan Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this section for fuel recommendation.*2: For additional information, see later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: For additional information, see later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number.*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which

is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures always above 32°F (0°C).*6: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended

brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.*7: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.*8: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.*10: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Sedan — Automatic transmissionmodels

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

For improved vehicle performance,INFINITI recommends the use of un-leaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI number (Re-search octane number 96).

Sedan — Manual transmissionand Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octanenumber 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, un-leaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of 87 AKI number (Research octanenumber 91) may be temporarily used, butonly under the following precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partiallywith unleaded regular gasoline, andfill up with unleaded premium gaso-

line as soon as possible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abruptacceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premiumgasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified couldadversely affect the emission controlsystem, and may also affect the warrantycoverage.

Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will damagethe three-way catalyst.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-able. Many of the automobile manufactur-ers developed this specification to im-prove emission control system and ve-hicle performance. Ask your servicestation manager if the gasoline meets theWWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producingreformulated gasolines. These gasolinesare specially designed to reduce vehicleemissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-wards cleaner air and suggests that youuse reformulated gasoline when avail-able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBEand methanol with or without advertisingtheir presence. INFINITI does not recom-mend the use of fuels of which the oxy-genate content and the fuel compatibilityfor your INFINITI cannot be readily deter-mined. If in doubt, ask your service sta-tion manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.

O The fuel must be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

methanol blend, is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel systemdamage and/or vehicle performanceproblems. At this time, sufficient datais not available to ensure that allmethanol blends are suitable for usein INFINITI vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as en-gine stalling and hard hot starting are ex-perienced after using oxygenate-blend fu-els, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blendof MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenatescan cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (i.e. fuel in-jector cleaner, octane booster, intakevalve deposit removers, etc.) which aresold commercially. Many of these addi-tives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful tothe fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended cancause persistent, heavy spark knock.(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasoline ofthe stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, have yourdealer correct the condition. Failure tocorrect the condition is misuse of the ve-hicle, for which INFINITI is not respon-sible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result inknocking, after-run or overheating. This inturn may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or damage to the engine. If any of

the above symptoms are encountered,have your vehicle checked at an INFINITIdealer or other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nocause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct qual-ity, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. INFINITIrecommends the use of a low friction oil(energy conserving oil) in order to im-prove fuel economy and conserve energy.Oils which do not have the specifiedquality label should not be used as theycould cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certificationmark on the front of the container shouldbe used. This type of oil supersedes theexisting API SG, SH, or SJ and EnergyConserving I & II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the APIcertification mark, use an API gradeSG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or APIgrade SJ or SL, Energy conserving oil. Anoil with a single designation SG or SH, orin combination with other categories (forexample, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also beused if one with the API certification markcannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I,GF-II, GF-III oil can also be used.

INFINITI recommends mineral based oils.These oils must however, meet the APIquality and SAE viscosity ratings specifiedfor your vehicle.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofoil additives. The use of an oil additive isnot necessary when the proper oil type isused and maintenance intervals are fol-lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important that the engine oil vis-cosity be selected based on the tempera-tures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The rec-ommended SAE viscosity number chartshows the recommended oil viscositiesfor the expected ambient temperatures.Choosing an oil viscosity other than thatrecommended could cause serious enginedamage.

STI0367


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use the genuine oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described inchange intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Oil andfilter other than the specified quality, oroil and filter change intervals longer thanrecommended could reduce engine life.Damage to engines caused by impropermaintenance or use of incorrect oil andfilter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-ered by the new INFINITI vehicle warran-ties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do nothave to change the oil before the first rec-ommended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle. Operation under the fol-lowing conditions may require more fre-quent oil and filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

O driving in dusty conditions,

O extensive idling,

O towing a trailer,

O stop and go “rush hour” traffic.

O aggressive driving

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the am-bient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

TI1028-C


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioning system in thisINFINITI vehicle must be charged withthe refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andthe lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil TypeS or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricantwill cause severe damage to the air condi-tioning system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner system compo-nents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerantdoes not affect the earth’s atmosphere,certain governmental regulations requirethe recovery and recycling of any refriger-ant during automotive air conditioningsystem service. An INFINITI dealer hasthe trained technicians and equipmentneeded to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when ser-

vicing your air conditioning system.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Idle speed rpmSee the emission control label onthe underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plugStandard PLFR5A-11

Service option PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehiclemeets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regula-tions.

TI0001-A

SPECIFICATIONS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheelType Position Size Offset in (mm)

Sedan Aluminum— 17 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)— 18 x 7-1/2JJ 1.77 (45)

Coupe Aluminum

Front 17 x 7-1/2JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 17 x 8JJ 1.30 (33)Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Front 19 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 19 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)

TireType Position Size Pressure (Cold)

Sedan

Conventional— P215/55R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)— 235/45R18 94W 230 kPa (33 psi)

Spare —T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi)T145/90D16*1 420 kPa (60 psi)P215/55R17 93V*2 210 kPa (30 psi)

CoupeConventional

Front P225/50R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)Rear P235/50R17 95V 210 kPa (30 psi)Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi)Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi)Front 225/40R19 89Y 240 kPa (35 psi)Rear 245/40R19 94Y 240 kPa (35 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi)

*1: For AWD models*2: Option for USA, conventional for Canada (for models with tire size

P215/55R17 93V)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Coupe

Overall length in (mm) 186.9 (4,747) 182.2 (4,628)

Overall width in (mm) 69.0 (1,753) 71.5 (1,815)

Overall height in (mm)57.7 (1,467)*158.4 (1,484)*2

54.8 (1,393)55.1 (1,399)*3

Front tread in (mm)59.1 (1,500)*159.3 (1,505)*2

60.4 (1,535)

Rear tread in (mm) 59.3 (1,505)60.6 (1,540)*460.8 (1,545)*5

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850) ←Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel on the driver’s side lockpillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: For 2WD models*2: For AWD models*3: For 19 in road wheel models*4: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 8JJ and 19 x 8-1/2JJ [offset 1.30 in (33

mm)]*5: For models with road wheel size — 18 x 8JJ [offset 1.18 in (30 mm)]


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

When planning to travel in another coun-try, you should first find out if the fuelavailable is suitable for your vehicle’s en-gine.

Using fuel with too low an octane ratingmay cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles must be operated with unleadedengine gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, prov-ince or district, it may be necessary tomodify the vehicle to meet local laws andregulations.

The laws and regulations for motor ve-hicle emission control and safety stan-dards vary according to the country,state, province or district; therefore, ve-hicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation, and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. INFINITI is notresponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is theidentification for your vehicle and is usedin the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0038 STI0302

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is af-fixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: GrossVehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR), month andyear of manufacture, Vehicle Identifica-tion Number (VIN), etc. Review it care-fully.

STI0303C STI0186BSedan

STI0330ACoupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label affixedto the driver side center pillar.

STI0317 STI0368ASedan

STI0331ACoupe


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

AIR CONDITIONERSPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label isaffixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0306

STI0332

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Use the following steps to mount the li-cense plate:

Before mounting the license plate, con-firm that the following parts are enclosedin the vinyl bag.

O License plate bracket

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

O Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license platebracket and mark the pilot hole pointsjA using holes jB while aligning thetowing hook hole of the front bumperfascia.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two pilot holes jA usinga 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at themarked locations. (Be sure that thedrill only goes through the fascia, ordamage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on thefascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into thegrommet hole to turn part jC 90 de-grees.

6. Insert a J-nut into the license platebracket before placing the licenseplate bracket on the fascia.

7. Install the license plate bracket withscrews.

8. Install the license plate with bolts thatare no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside of a vehicle. In a col-lision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled

O Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-hicle) - vehicle weight including: stan-dard and optional equipment, fluids,emergency tools, and spare tire as-sembly. This weight does not includepassengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight of

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

passengers and cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, lug-gage, hitch, trailer tongue load andany other optional equipment. This in-formation is located on the F.M.V.S.S.label.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S. label.

O GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load (pas-sengers and cargo) for the vehicle.This is the maximum combined weightof occupants and cargo that can beloaded into the vehicle. If the vehicleis used to tow a trailer, the trailertongue weight must be included aspart of the cargo load. This informa-tion is located on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

O Cargo capacity - permissible weight ofcargo, the subtracted weight of occu-pants from the load limit.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as “Seat-ing Capacity” on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

To get “the combined weight of occupantsand cargo”, add the weight of all occu-pants, then add the total luggage weightto the value. Examples are shown in theillustration.

Steps for determining correct loadlimit

(1) Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX pounds.

(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. [1,400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.]

(5) Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. For safety, that weightmust not exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S.certification label.

O Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

STI0365


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Do not placecargo higher than the seatbacks. In asudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe GVWR or the maximum front and rearGAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could occur, or itcan change the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in loss of con-trol and cause personal injury.

O Overloading not only could shorten thelife of your vehicle and the tires, but alsocould lead to hazardous vehicle handlingand long braking distance. This maycause a premature tire malfunction,which could result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by the vehi-cle’s warranty.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailerand its cargo can adversely affect vehiclehandling, braking and performance and maylead to accidents.

CAUTION

O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

O For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

A new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-member that towing a trailer will place ad-ditional loads on a vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceedthe value specified in the TowingLoad/Specification Chart found later in thissection. The total trailer load equals trailerweight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified orusing improper towing equipment couldadversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance. The ability of a vehicle totow a trailer is not only related to the maxi-

TI1011M

TOWING A TRAILER


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

mum trailer loads, but also the places youplan to tow. Tow weights appropriate forlevel highway driving may have to be re-duced on very steep grades or in low trac-tion situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures are not covered byINFINITI warranties.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%of the total trailer load within the maximumtongue load limits shown in the followingTowing Load/Specification Chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrangecargo to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing ve-hicle must not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross ve-hicle weight equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, lug-gage, hitch, trailer tongue load and anyother optional equipment. In addition,front or rear gross axle weight must not ex-ceed GAWR shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TI1012M


Z 05.2.23/V35-D/V5.0 X

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHARTUnit: lb (kg)

MAXIMUMTOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

100 (45.4)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle andtrailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is se-curely attached to the vehicle, to helpavoid personal injury or property damagedue to sway caused by crosswinds, roughroad surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for a trailer:

O The required hitch ball size is stampedon most trailer couplers. Most hitchballs also have the size printed on topof the ball.

O Choose the proper class hitch ballbased on the trailer weight.

O The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to theball mount hole diameter. The hitchball shank should be no more than1/169 smaller than the hole in the ballmount.

O The threaded shank of the hitch ballmust be long enough to be properlysecured to the ball mount. Thereshould be at least 2 threads showingbeyond the lock washer and nut.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equip-ment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb(909 kg) maximum weight rating, but yourvehicle is only capable of towing themaximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier inthis section.

CAUTION

O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

O The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

O Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

O To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

O After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

O Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

O When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tire and


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Loading Information label (located onthe driver side center pillar).

O Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturers’ specifications.

Safety chain

Always use a suitable chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safetychains should be crossed and should beattached to the hitch, not to the vehiclebumper or axle. Be sure to leave enoughslack in the chains to permit turning cor-ners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights while us-ing the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn

signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no more than15 milliamps from the stop and tail lampcircuits. Using a module/converter that ex-ceeds these power requirements may dam-age the vehicle’s electrical system. See areputable trailer dealer to obtain the properequipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, contact anINFINITI dealer or reputable trailerdealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it isproperly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

O Be certain your vehicle maintains alevel position when a loaded and/orunloaded trailer is hitched. Do notdrive the vehicle if it has an abnormalnose-up or nose-down condition;check for improper tongue load, over-load, worn suspension or other pos-sible causes of either condition.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shifts while driving.

O Load the trailer so approximately 60%of the trailer load is in the front halfand 40% is in the back half.

O Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op-eration, and trailer wheel lug nutsevery time you attach a trailer to thevehicle.

O Be certain your rear view mirrors con-form to all federal, state or local regu-lations. If not, install any mirrors re-quired for towing before driving thevehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an under-standing of the vehicle’s behavior, you


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

should practice turning, stopping andbacking up in an area which is free fromtraffic. Steering stability, and braking per-formance will be somewhat different thanunder normal driving conditions.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration orstops.

O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

O Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed. Some states or provinceshave specific speed limits for vehiclesthat are towing trailers. Obey the localspeed limits.

O When backing up, hold the bottom ofthe steering wheel with one hand.Move your hand in the direction inwhich you want the trailer to go. Makesmall corrections and back up slowly.If possible, have someone guide youwhen you are backing up.

O Always block the wheels on both ve-hicle and trailer when parking. Parkingon a slope is not recommended; how-ever, if you must do so, and if your ve-hicle is equipped with automatictransmission, first apply the parking

brake and block the wheels, and thenmove the transmission selector leverinto the P (Park) position. If you movethe selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion before applying the parking brakeand blocking the wheels, transmissiondamage could occur.

O When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brakingeffect. When going up a long grade,downshift the transmission to a lowergear and reduce speed to reducechances of engine overloading and/oroverheating.However, for long steep grades, donot stay in 1st or 2nd gear when driv-ing above 35 MPH (56 km/h).

O If the engine coolant rises to an ex-tremely high temperature when the airconditioning system is on, turn off theair conditioner. Coolant heat can beadditionally vented by opening thewindows, switching the fan control tohigh and setting the temperature con-trol to the HOT position.

O Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500miles (800 km).

O Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified in the rec-ommended maintenance schedule inthe INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide.

O When making a turn, your trailerwheels will be closer to the inside ofthe turn than your vehicle wheels. Tocompensate for this, make a largerthan normal turning radius during theturn.

O Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. Whenbeing passed by larger vehicles, beprepared for possible changes incrosswinds that could affect vehiclehandling. If swaying does occur,firmly grip the steering wheel, steerstraight ahead, and immediately (butgradually) reduce vehicle speed. Thiscombination will help stabilize the ve-hicle. Never increase speed.

O Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing while towing a trailerrequires considerably more distancethan normal passing. Remember thelength of the trailer must also pass


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

the other vehicle before you can safelychange lanes.

O To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance,do not use sixth gear (manual trans-mission) or fifth position (automatictransmission).

O Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, re-sulting in reduced braking efficiency.

O Increase your following distance to al-low for greater stopping distanceswhile towing a trailer. Anticipate stopsand brake gradually.

O Do not use cruise control while towinga trailer.

O Check your hitch, trailer wiring har-ness connections, and trailer wheellug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) oftravel and at every break.

O When stopped in traffic for long pe-riods of time in hot weather, put thevehicle in the P (Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently.

For additional information, see the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground is sometimes called flattowing. This method is sometimes usedwhen towing a vehicle behind a recre-ational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

O Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

O DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

O For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by INFINITI”in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-tion of this manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate ve-hicle dolly MUST be placed under thetowed vehicle’s drive wheels. Alwaysfollow the dolly manufacturer’s recom-mendations when using their product.

Manual transmission

O Always tow with the manual transmis-sion in Neutral.

O After towing 500 miles, start and idlethe engine with the transmission inNeutral for two minutes. Failure to idlethe engine after every 500 miles oftowing may cause damage to thetransmission’s internal parts.


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on tire wear rate when testedunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test courses. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100. How-ever, relative tire performance dependson actual driving conditions, and mayvary significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those gradesrepresent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your vehicletires is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests and does not include accel-eration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. They represent a tire’s resis-tance to heat build-up, and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause tire material to de-generate, reducing tire life. Excessivetemperatures can lead to sudden tire fail-ure. Grade C corresponds to a perfor-mance level which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor Ve-hicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Aand B represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on laboratory test wheels than theminimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat build-up and possible tire failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet fordetails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet (Warranty andRoadside Assistance Information (Canadaonly)) that comes with your INFINITI. Ifyou did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet (Warranty and Roadside As-sistance Information (Canada only)), or ithas become lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90247-6838

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingINFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-vidual problems between you, yourdealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transporta-tion, Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information about mo-tor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify INFINITI by contactingour Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive(AWD) should never be tested using a twowheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-mometers used by some states for emis-sions testing), or similar equipment. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with AWDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer. Us-ing the wrong test equipment may resultin transmission damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to bein what is called the “ready condition” foran Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the “ready condition”can be obtained by ordinary usage of thevehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a not “ready con-dition”. Before taking the I/M test, checkthe vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Turn the ignition

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

switch ON without starting the engine. Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test con-dition is “ready”. If the MIL indicates thevehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drivethe vehicle through the following patternto set the vehicle to the ready condition.If you cannot or do not want to performthe driving pattern, an INFINITI dealercan conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-dent manner according to traffic conditionsand obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine toidle until the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge needle points between theC and H (normal operating tempera-ture).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accel-erator pedal completely and keep it re-leased for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedalfor a moment, then drive the vehicle ata speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the enginerunning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for atleast 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatictransmission selector lever in the “P”or “N” position or the manual trans-mission shift lever in the “N” position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least onemore time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving modeis acceptable between steps. Do not stopthe engine until step 7 is completed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control anumber of systems to optimize perfor-mance and help service technicians withdiagnosis and repair. Depending on theequipment on your vehicle, some of thecomputers monitor emission control sys-tems, braking systems and air bag sys-tems, just to name a few. Some dataabout vehicle operation may be stored inthe computers for use during servicing.Other data may be stored if a crash eventoccurs. For example, air bag readiness,air bag performance, and seat belt use bythe driver or passenger may be recorded,depending on vehicle equipment. Thesetypes of systems are sometimes calledEvent Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are notrecorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equip-ment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special re-search. It might also be accessed withthe consent of the vehicle owner orlessee, in response to a request by lawenforcement, or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is thebest source of service and repair informa-tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiringdiagrams, illustrations and step-by-stepdiagnostic and adjustment procedures,this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at anINFINITI dealer. Also available aregenuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, andgenuine INFINITI Service and Owner’sManuals for older INFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the2000 model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the1999 model year and prior, see anINFINITI dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for

the 2005 model year and prior, see anINFINITI dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer. For the phonenumber and location of an INFINITIdealer in your area call the INFINITI Sat-isfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792 and abilingual INFINITI representative will as-sist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser-vice and Owner’s Manuals for olderINFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some importantinformation you should know. Many insur-ance companies routinely authorize theuse of non-genuine collision parts inorder to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of GenuineInfiniti Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restoredusing parts made to INFINITI’s originalexacting specifications — if you want tohelp it to last and hold its resale value,the solution is simple. Tell your insuranceagent and your repair shop to only useGenuine Infiniti Collision Parts. INFINITIdoes not warrant non-Infiniti parts, nordoes Infiniti’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine parts.

Using Genuine Infiniti Parts can help pro-tect your personal safety, preserve yourwarranty protection and maintain the re-sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-hicle was leased, using Genuine InfinitiParts may prevent or limit unnecessaryexcess wear and tear expenses at the endof your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hoodwill penetrate the windshield of your ve-hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-tion) parts may not provide such built insafety features. Also, non-genuine partsoften show premature wear, rust and cor-rosion.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUALORDER INFORMATION


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you mustbe advised if non-genuine parts are usedto repair your vehicle. And somestates/provinces have enacted laws thatrestrict insurance companies from autho-rizing the use of non-genuine collisionparts during the new vehicle warranty.These laws help protect you, so you cantake action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further informationvisit us at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.infiniticanada.ca (for Canadian cus-tomers)


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 04.10.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

10 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock brake system).......... 5-26Air bag warning labels ................... 1-50Air bag warning light............. 1-51, 2-13Air cleaner housing filter ................ 8-20Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation........... 4-11Air conditioner service ..... 4-11, 4-14Air conditioner specificationlabel ......................................... 9-13Air conditioning systemrefrigerant and lubricantrecommendations .............. 4-14, 9-7Heater and air conditioner(automatic)................................ 4-11In-cabin microfilter ................... 4-14

Alcohol, drugs and driving ............... 5-5Ambient temperature, Airconditioner ..................................... 4-13Anchor point locations

Top tether strap ........................ 1-27Antenna.......................................... 4-28Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-26Anti-lock brake warning light............ 2-9Appearance care

Exterior appearance care............. 7-2

Interior appearance care............. 7-3Armrest ............................................ 1-9Ashtray (See cigarette lighter andashtray).......................................... 2-29Audible reminders .......................... 2-15Audio operation precautions........... 4-16Audio system ................................. 4-15Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD) .... 4-25Autolight system ............................ 2-21Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-32Automatic sunroof..................... 2-39Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-13Automatic transmission positionindicator light ........................... 2-14Drive positioner......................... 3-34Driving with automatictransmission ...................... 5-6, 5-11Seat positioner, seat................. 3-34Transmission selector lever lockrelease...................................... 5-15

Avoiding collision and rollover ......... 5-5AWD (all wheel drive) warninglight ...................................... 2-10, 5-22

B

Battery ........................................... 8-16Battery saver system................. 2-23

Before starting the engine.............. 5-10Belts (See drive belts) .................... 8-18Booster seats ................................. 1-30Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .... 5-26Brake and clutch fluid............... 8-14Brake booster ........................... 8-23Brake fluid ................................ 8-14Brake pedal .............................. 8-22Brake pedal check .................... 8-22Brake system ............................ 5-25Parking brake check ........ 5-18, 8-22Parking brake operation............ 5-18Warning light ............................ 2-10

Break-in schedule........................... 5-21Brightness control, Instrumentpanel.............................................. 2-23Bulb check/instrument panel............ 2-9Bulb replacement ........................... 8-30

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

C

Cabin air filter ................................ 4-14Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......................................... 9-2Car phone or CB radio.................... 4-29Catalytic converter, Three waycatalyst ............................................ 5-3CD care and cleaning ..................... 4-27Child restraints............................... 1-18

Precautions on childrestraints .................................. 1-18Top tether strap anchor pointlocations ................................... 1-27With top tether strap................. 1-26

Child safety .................................... 1-12Child safety rear door lock ............... 3-5Chimes

Audible reminders..................... 2-15Seat belt warning light andchime........................................ 2-13

Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......... 2-29Circuit breaker, Fusible link............ 8-25Cleaning exterior and interior.... 7-2, 7-3Clock .............................................. 2-28Clutch fluid..................................... 8-14Coat hook....................................... 2-36Cold weather driving ...................... 5-29Compact Disc (CD) changeroperation........................................ 4-25Compass display .............................. 2-6

Console box ................................... 2-34Controls, Heater and air conditionercontrols (automatic)........................ 4-11Coolant

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine coolant............. 8-9Checking engine coolant level..... 8-8

Corrosion protection......................... 7-5Cruise control................................. 5-19Cup holder ..................................... 2-31

D

Daytime running light system......... 2-23Defroster switch, Rear windowand outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................ 2-20Dimensions and weights .................. 9-9Door open warning light................. 2-11Drive belts...................................... 8-18Drive positioner, Automatic ............ 3-34Driving

Cold weather driving ................. 5-29Driving with automatictransmission ...................... 5-6, 5-11Driving with manualtransmission ...................... 5-7, 5-15Precautions when starting anddriving ........................................ 5-2

E

Economy, Fuel ................................ 5-22Emission control informationlabel............................................... 9-12Emission control systemwarranty ......................................... 9-24Engine

Before starting the engine......... 5-10Break-in schedule ..................... 5-21Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine coolant............. 8-9Changing engine oil and filter ... 8-11Checking engine coolant level..... 8-8Checking engine oil level .......... 8-10Coolant temperature gauge ......... 2-4Engine block heater .................. 5-30Engine compartment checklocations ..................................... 8-7Engine cooling system ................ 8-8Engine oil.................................. 8-10Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation ......................... 9-5Engine oil viscosity ..................... 9-5Engine serial number ................ 9-11Engine specifications .................. 9-8If your vehicle overheats .......... 6-11Starting the engine ................... 5-10

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ....... 5-2

10-2

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

F

F.M.V.S.S. certification label............ 9-11Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ............ 8-20Changing engine oil and filter .... 8-11

Flashers (See hazard warningflasherswitch) ........................................... 2-24Flat tire............................................. 6-2Flat tire, Low tire pressure warningsystem ............................................. 5-3Floor mat cleaning ............................ 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-13Brake and clutch fluid ................ 8-14Brake fluid ................................ 8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Engine coolant............................. 8-8Engine oil .................................. 8-10Power steering fluid................... 8-14Window washer fluid ................. 8-15

FM-AM-SATELLITE radio withcompact disc (CD) changer .............. 4-22Fog light switch............................... 2-24Front power seat adjustment ............. 1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2

Filler cap ................................... 3-29Filler lid..................................... 3-28Fuel economy ............................ 5-22Fuel economy information(display)...................................... 4-4Fuel octane rating ........................ 9-3Fuel recommendation .................. 9-3Gauge ......................................... 2-5

Fuses.............................................. 8-24Fusible links ................................... 8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver ...................... 2-44Gas cap .......................................... 3-29Gauge .............................................. 2-3

Engine coolant temperaturegauge.......................................... 2-4Fuel gauge................................... 2-5Odometer.................................... 2-3Speedometer............................... 2-3Tachometer ................................. 2-4

General maintenance ........................ 8-2Glove box ....................................... 2-33Glove box (upper)............................ 2-34Glove box lock ................................ 2-33

H

Hazard warning flasher switch......... 2-24

Head restraints ................................. 1-8Headlights

Bulb replacement ...................... 8-32Headlight switch........................ 2-21Xenon headlights ...................... 2-20

Heated seats .................................. 2-25Heater

Engine coolant heater ................ 5-30Heater and air conditioner(automatic)................................ 4-11

HomeLink Universal Transceiver .... 2-44Hood release .................................. 3-24Hook, Coat hook ............................. 2-36Horn ............................................... 2-25

I

Ignition knob (Intelligent Keysystem) ................................... 3-14, 5-8Ignition knob positions..................... 5-9Ignition switch

(except Intelligent Key system) .... 5-6Automatic transmissionmodels............................... 5-6, 5-11Key positions............................... 5-7Manual transmissionmodels............................... 5-7, 5-15

Immobilizer system ........................ 2-18In-cabin microfilter ......................... 4-14Indicator lights............................... 2-14INFINITI air bag system.................. 1-42

10-3

Z 05.2.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer SystemEngine start ......................... 5-8, 5-9

Inside automatic anti-glaremirror ............................................. 3-32Inspection/maintenance (I/M)test ................................................ 9-24Instrument brightness control ........ 2-23Instrument panel.............................. 2-2Intelligent Key system...................... 3-9Intelligent Key system, Enginestarting .......................................... 3-14Intelligent Key system, Keyoperating range.............................. 3-16Intelligent Key system, Keyoperation........................................ 3-11Intelligent Key system, Mechanicalkey and valet key ........................... 3-23Intelligent Key system, Operatingthe engine...................................... 3-14Intelligent Key system, Remotekeyless operation ........................... 3-20Intelligent Key system,Trouble-shooting guide................... 3-19Intelligent Key system, Warninglight ............................................... 2-11Intelligent Key system, Warningsignals ........................................... 3-17Intelligent key warning light .......... 2-11Interior light replacement............... 8-32Interior lights ................................. 2-41Interior trunk lid release ................ 3-27

J

Jump starting.................................... 6-8

K

Keyless entryWith Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) ..... 3-20Without Intelligent Key system(See remote keyless entrysystem) ....................................... 3-5

Keys, Except Intelligent Key ............. 3-2Keys, For Intelligent Key system ...... 3-9Knob, Ignition knob (Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................ 5-8

L

Label, Air conditioner specificationlabel............................................... 9-13Label, Emission control informationlabel............................................... 9-12Label, F.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel............................................... 9-11Labels

Air bag warning labels .............. 1-50Engine serial number ................ 9-11Vehicle identification number(VIN) ......................................... 9-10

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system ...................... 1-24License plate, Installing frontlicense plate................................... 9-13Light

Air bag warning light ................ 1-51Bulb replacement ...................... 8-30Fog light switch......................... 2-24Headlight switch ....................... 2-21Headlights Bulb replacement .... 8-32Interior lights............................ 2-41Replacement ............................. 8-30Trunk light ................................ 2-44Vanity mirror light ..................... 2-43Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders....... 2-9, 2-14Xenon headlights ...................... 2-20

Lights, Exterior and interior lightreplacement ................................... 8-32Loading information (See vehicleloading information) ....................... 9-14Lock

Door locks................................... 3-3Glove box lock .......................... 2-33Power door lock .......................... 3-3Trunk lid lock opener lever........ 3-25

Low fuel warning light .................... 2-12Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-12Low tire pressure warning system .... 5-3

10-4

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

M

MaintenanceBattery ...................................... 8-16General maintenance................... 8-2Inside the vehicle........................ 8-4Maintenance information(display)...................................... 4-5Maintenance precautions............. 8-5Maintenance requirements .......... 8-2Outside the vehicle...................... 8-3Seat belt maintenance ............... 1-17

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)..... 2-14Mechanical key (for Intelligent Keysystem) .......................................... 3-23Meters and gauges ........................... 2-3Meters and gauges, Instrumentbrightness control........................... 2-23Mirror

Automatic anti-glare insidemirror........................................ 3-32Outside mirror control................ 3-33Outside mirrors ......................... 3-33

N

New vehicle break-in....................... 5-21INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem ........................................... 2-18

O

Odometer ......................................... 2-3Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine oil and filter .... 8-11Checking engine oil level ........... 8-10Engine oil .................................. 8-10Engine oil viscosity ...................... 9-5

Operating the engine (IntelligentKey system) .................................... 3-14Outside mirror control ..................... 3-33Outside mirrors............................... 3-33Overheat, If your vehicle overheats . 6-11Owner’s Manual/Service Manualorder information............................ 9-26

P

ParkingBrake check............................... 8-22Parking brake check .................. 5-18Parking brake operation............. 5-18Parking on hills ......................... 5-18

Parking/parking on hills.................. 5-24Phone, Car phone or CB radio .......... 4-29Power

Front seat adjustment .................. 1-2Power door lock........................... 3-3Power outlet .............................. 2-28

Power steering fluid................... 8-14Power steering system............... 5-25Power windows ......................... 2-37

Pre-tensioner seat belt system ........ 1-49Precautions

Audio operation......................... 4-16Braking precautions .................. 5-25Child restraints.......................... 1-18Cruise control ............................ 5-20Maintenance ............................... 8-5Seat belt usage ........................... 1-9Supplemental restraintsystem ...................................... 1-35When starting and driving ............ 5-2

Push starting .................................. 6-10

R

Radio, Car phone or CB radio........... 4-29Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ..... 9-24Rear armrest pocket ........................ 2-35Rear power point............................. 2-28Rear seat adjustment ........................ 1-5Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................ 2-20Registering your vehicle in anothercountry........................................... 9-10

10-5

Z 05.2.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

Remote keyless entrySystem, Except Intelligent Keysystem ........................................ 3-5System, For Intelligent Keysystem ...................................... 3-20

Reporting safety defects(US only)......................................... 9-24Roadside assistance program............ 6-2Rollover ............................................ 5-5

S

SafetyChild seat belts ......................... 1-12Reporting safety defects (USonly) ......................................... 9-24Towing safety ............................ 9-19

SeatBelt warning light ...................... 1-10Belt warning light and chime...... 2-13

Seat adjustmentFront power seat adjustment........ 1-2Rear seat adjustment................... 1-5

Seat belt(s)Child safety ............................... 1-12Injured persons......................... 1-13Larger children .......................... 1-13Pre-tensioner seat beltsystem ...................................... 1-49Precautions on seat belt usage..... 1-9Pregnant women........................ 1-13

Seat belt cleaning........................ 7-4Seat belt extenders.................... 1-17Seat belt maintenance ............... 1-17Seat belts.................................... 1-9Three-point type withretractor.................................... 1-13

Seat(s)Driver-side memory ................... 3-35Heated seats ............................. 2-25Seats .......................................... 1-2

Secondary trunk lid release ............. 3-27Security system, Vehicle securitysystem ........................................... 2-16Security systems (INFINITI VehicleImmobilizer System), Enginestart ............................................... 2-18Security systems (See vehiclesecurity system).............................. 2-16Servicing air conditioner......... 4-11, 4-14Shift lock release ............................ 5-15Shifting

Automatic transmission ...... 5-6, 5-11Manual transmission .......... 5-7, 5-15

Spark plugs .................................... 8-19Speedometer .................................... 2-3Starting

Before starting the engine.......... 5-10Jump starting............................... 6-8Precautions when starting anddriving ........................................ 5-2Push starting............................. 6-10

Starting the engine .................... 5-10Steering

Power steering fluid................... 8-14Power steering system............... 5-25Steering switch for audiocontrol ...................................... 4-27Tilting steering wheel................. 3-30

Storage .......................................... 2-30Stowing golf bags ........................... 2-36Sun shade ...................................... 2-40Sun visors ...................................... 3-32Sunglasses holder .......................... 2-31Sunroof .......................................... 2-39

Automatic sunroof ..................... 2-39Supplemental air bag warninglabels ............................................. 1-50Supplemental air bagwarning light ......................... 1-51, 2-13Supplemental restraint system........ 1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ...................................... 1-35

SwitchAutolight switch ........................ 2-21Fog light switch ......................... 2-24Hazard warning flasherswitch ....................................... 2-24Headlight switch........................ 2-21Ignition knob (Intelligent Keysystem) ....................................... 5-8Ignition switch (exceptIntelligent Key system) ................ 5-6

10-6

Z 05.2.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

Ignition switch automatictransmission models .......... 5-6, 5-11Ignition switch manualtransmission models .......... 5-7, 5-15Power door lock switch ................ 3-4Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch......................... 2-20Snow mode switch..................... 2-27Turn signal switch...................... 2-24Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)off switch .................................. 2-27

T

Tachometer ...................................... 2-4Temperature gauge, Engine coolanttemperature gauge ........................... 2-4Theft (INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), Engine start ...................... 2-18Three way catalyst ............................ 5-3Tilting steering wheel...................... 3-30Tire

Flat tire........................................ 6-2Low tire pressure warningsystem ........................................ 5-3Pressure, Low tire pressurewarning light ............................. 2-12Tire and loading informationlabel................................. 8-38, 9-12Uniform tire quality grading ....... 9-23

TiresChanging wheels and tires ......... 8-43Tire chains................................. 8-42Tire pressure ............................. 8-36Types of tires............................. 8-41Wheel/tire size ............................ 9-9Wheels and tires........................ 8-36

Top tether strap child restraints....... 1-26Towing

Tow truck towing ....................... 6-12Towing a trailer.......................... 9-17Towing load/specification chart . 9-19Towing safety ............................ 9-19

Trailer towing.................................. 9-17Transceiver, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ..................................... 2-44Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-13Driving with automatictransmission ...................... 5-6, 5-11Driving with manualtransmission ...................... 5-7, 5-15Transmission selector lever lockrelease...................................... 5-15

Transmitter, With Intelligent Keysystem (See Intelligent Keysystem) .......................................... 3-20Transmitter, Without Intelligent Keysystem (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................ 3-5

Traveling or registering yourvehicle in another country ............... 9-10Trip computer information(display) ........................................... 4-4Trouble-shooting guide (forIntelligent Key system) ................... 3-19Trunk lid ......................................... 3-25Turn signal switch........................... 2-24

U

Underbody cleaning.......................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading............. 9-23Up-shift indicator (M/T models) ....... 5-16

V

Valet key (for Intelligent Keysystem) .......................................... 3-23Vanity mirror light ........................... 2-43Vehicle

Dimensions and weights.............. 9-9Identification number (VIN) ....... 9-10Loading information .................. 9-14Recovery (freeing a stuckvehicle) ..................................... 6-15Security system ......................... 2-16Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)off switch .................................. 2-27

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system ........................................... 5-27

10-7

Z 05.2.25/V35-D/V5.0 X

Ventilators...................................... 4-10

W

Walk-in mechanism .......................... 1-4Warning labels, Air bag warninglabels ............................................. 1-50Warning light

Air bag warning light ....... 1-51, 2-13Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-9AWD (all wheel drive) warninglight .......................................... 2-10Brake warning light................... 2-10Door open warning light............ 2-11Intelligent Key warning light ..... 2-11Low fuel warning light............... 2-12Low tire pressure warninglight .......................................... 2-12P position selecting warninglight .......................................... 2-12Seat belt warning light andchime........................................ 2-13

Warning lights.................................. 2-9Warning, Hazard warning flasherswitch ............................................ 2-24Warning, Low tire pressure warningsystem ............................................. 5-3Warning, Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders ..................... 2-9Warranty, Emission control systemwarranty ......................................... 9-24

Washer switch, Windshield wiperand washer switch ......................... 2-19Washing ........................................... 7-2Waxing ............................................. 7-2Weights (See dimensions andweights) ........................................... 9-9Wheel/tire size ................................. 9-9Wheels and tires ............................ 8-36

Cleaning aluminum alloywheels ........................................ 7-3

Window washer fluid ...................... 8-15Window(s)

Cleaning...................................... 7-3Power windows ......................... 2-37

Windshield wiper and washerswitch ............................................ 2-19Wiper

Windshield wiper and washerswitch ....................................... 2-19Wiper blades............................. 8-20

X

Xenon headlights ........................... 2-20

10-8

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Sedan models

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

For improved vehicle performance,INFINITI recommends the use of un-leaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI number (Re-search octane number 96).

Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octanenumber 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, un-leaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of 87 AKI number (Research octanenumber 91) may be temporarily used, butonly under the following precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partiallywith unleaded regular gasoline, andfill up with unleaded premium gaso-line as soon as possible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abruptacceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premiumgasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified couldadversely affect the emission controlsystem, and may also affect the warrantycoverage.

Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will damagethe three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capaci-ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” inthe “9. Technical and consumer informa-tion” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

O API Certification Mark

O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I& II or API grade SJ or SL, EnergyConserving

O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferredfor all ambient temperatures. SAE10W-30 viscosity oil may be used for

ambient temperatures above 0°F(−18°C).

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for engine oiland oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See Tire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the inside of the driver sidecenter pillar.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendationsoutlined in the “Break-in schedule” Infor-mation found in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section of this Owner’s Manual.Follow these recommendations for the fu-ture reliability and economy of your newvehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Engine oil 8-10

2. Meters and gauges 2-3

3. Hood release 3-24

4. Seat 1-2

5. Seat belt 1-9

6. Key 3-2

7. Spare tire 6-4, 8-46

8. Fuel 3-28, 9-2

9. Audio system 4-15Heater and air conditioner 4-11

10. Battery 8-16

11. Engine coolant 8-8

12. Windshield washer fluid 8-15

STI0408

Z 04.10.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Documents

05 Infiniti G35 Owners Manual